ED3100G150 (Operating Instructions MCS Platinum

Operating Instructions
Nacos Platinum
Software Version 1.0
MCS Platinum
Machine Control System
Item No.: ED 3100 G 150 Revision: 03 (2011-12) Order No.: 390008513

© SAM Electronics GmbH 2011
The reproduction, distribution, and utilization of this document as well as the
communication of its content to others without explicit authorization is prohibited.
Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages.
All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model, or design.
Alterations due to technical progress are reserved.
SAM Electronics GmbH

D - 22763 Hamburg
Service
Customer Support Center
Phone: + 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 53
Fax: + 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 54
E-mail: shipservice@sam-electronics.de
NACOS Platinum List of Contents
List of Contents
I GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 1
1 About these Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 3
1.1 Aim and Scope of these Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-4
1.2 Validity of these Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-5
1.3 Availability of these Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-6
1.4 How to Find Information in the Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-7
1.4.1 Structure of the Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-8
1.4.2 How to find Information on Specific Subjects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-9
1.5 Typographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 10
2 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 13
2.1 Warnings and Notes in these Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 14
2.2 Meaning of Safety Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 15
2.3 General Safety Notes – NACOS Platinum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 17
2.4 Authorisation and Qualification of Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 18
2.5 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 19
2.6 Obligatory Safety Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 20
3 NACOS Platinum System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 21

3.1 What is the NACOS Platinum? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 22
3.2 Customisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 23
3.3 Applicable Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 25
4 Multi Function Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 27

4.1 General System Description MFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 28
4.2 Operating Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 29
4.2.1 Pointing Devices – Trackball and Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 30
4.2.2 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 32
4.2.3 The ASCII Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 33
4.2.4 The RADAR Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 34
4.2.5 The TRACKPILOT Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 35
4.3 TFT Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 36
4.3.1 Nominal Viewing Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 37
4.3.2 Colour Distortions on Monitors with Flat Screens (TFT Monitors) . . . . . I - 38
4.3.3 Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 39
4.4 Startup and Shutdown of MFDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 40
4.5 Basic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 41
4.5.1 Adjusting the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 42
4.5.2 Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 43
5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 45

5.1 Super Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 46
5.2 Screen Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 47
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) 3

OI_ANC2010_TOC.fm /14.12.2011
List of Contents NACOS Platinum
5.2.1 Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 48

5.2.1.1 Brilliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 48
5.2.1.2 Active Application Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 49
5.2.1.3 Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 49
5.2.1.4 Alive Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 49
5.3 Sidebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 51
5.3.1 Permanent Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 52
5.3.2 Non-Permanent Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 54
5.3.3 Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 56
5.3.3.1 Full Screen Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 58
5.4 Application Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 59
5.4.1 Application Area Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 60
5.5 Tabbed Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 62
5.6 Lists & Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 64
5.7 Dialogues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 66
5.7.1 Popup Edit Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 67
5.8 Tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 68
5.9 Controls – Adjusting Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 69
5.9.1 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 70
5.9.2 Field Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 71
5.9.3 Sliders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 72
5.9.4 Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 73
5.9.5 Dropdown Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 74
5.9.6 Check Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 75
5.9.7 Scroll Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 76
5.9.8 Spin boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 77
5.9.9 Keys for Numeric Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 78
5.9.10 Zoom and Pan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 79
5.9.11 Alphanumeric and Graphical Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 80
5.9.12 Alarm Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 81
5.10 Mouse Pointers and Clicks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 82
5.10.1 Pointers in RADAR and ECDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 83
5.10.2 Mouse Pointers for Machinery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 84
E MACHINERY MCS Platinum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 1

1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 3
1.1 Safety Precautions – MCS Platinum . . ............ . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 3
1.1.1 Work on Live Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 3
1.1.2 Maintenance and Repair . . . . . . . . . ............ . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 3
1.1.3 Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . ............ . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 4
1.2 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 4
1.3 Definitions and Terms MCS Platinum . ............ . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 5
2 System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 9
2.1 MCS Platinum Main Components and System Architecture . . . . . . . . . . E - 10
2.2 MCS Platinum as Stand-Alone Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 11
4 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

OI_ANC2010_TOC.fm /14.12.2011
2.3 Basic Alarm System - Duty Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 12

2.4 Extended Alarm System for Unattended Machinery Area . . . . . . . . . . . E - 13
2.5 Customisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 14
3 Functional Description of the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E - 15

3.1 General Introduction to the MCS Platinum System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 15
3.2 Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 15
3.2.1 Hardware Channels vs. Monitoring Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 16
3.2.2 Input / Output Channels of Field Processing Devices (Hardware I/O) . . E - 16
3.2.3 Inputs and Outputs of Monitoring Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 17
3.3 Monitoring Channel Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 18
3.3.1 Alarm Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 19
3.3.2 Event Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 19
3.3.3 Binary Monitoring Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 19
3.3.4 Analog Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 22
3.4 Channel Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 24
3.4.1 Channel ID and Yard ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 24
3.4.2 Channel Text (<channel name>) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 24
3.4.3 Channel Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 24
3.5 Integrated Alarm Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 25
3.6 Alarm Announcement and Acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 27
3.6.1 Alarm States and Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 28
3.6.2 Alarm Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 28
3.6.3 Alarm Ranking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 28
3.7 Overruling Output – Suppressing Alarms/Simulating Output Values . . . E - 29
3.7.1 Manual Cut-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 29
3.7.2 Automatic Cut-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 30
3.7.3 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 30
3.8 Alarm Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 30
3.9 Alarm Output Organisation – Duty Watch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 31
3.9.1 Selectable Watch Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 31
3.10 Unattended Watch Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 32
3.10.1 Selecting Duty Officer/Engineer and Backup Officer/Engineer . . . . . . . E - 32
3.10.2 Duty LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 33
3.10.3 Duty Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 33
3.10.4 Alarm Escalation – All Operators Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 34
3.11 How Alarms Are Indicated on Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 34
3.11.1 Alarm Announcement on the Local Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 36
3.11.2 Alarm Announcement on the Watch Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 36
3.11.3 Alarm Announcement on the Duty Alarm Panel Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 36
3.12 Calling System for Engineers (Assist Call) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 37
3.13 Deadman Alarm Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 37
3.14 MCS Platinum Printing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 37
3.14.1 Printer Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 38
3.14.2 Printer Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 38
3.14.3 Printer Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 38
3.14.4 Printer Time-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 39
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) 5

OI_ANC2010_TOC.fm /14.12.2011
3.15 Standard Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 39

3.16 Interface to External Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 40
4 General Description of the Operator Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 41

4.1 Operator Panel Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 42
4.2 Main Components of the Different Operator Panel Types . . . . . . . . . . E - 42
4.2.1 Duty Alarm Panel (Bridge, ECR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 42
4.2.2 Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 43
4.2.3 Local Operator Panel (LOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 43
4.3 Display (LCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 43
4.4 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 44
4.5 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 44
4.6 Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 45
4.7 Backlight Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 46
4.8 Layout Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 46
5 Operating Instructions for the Operator Panels . . . . . . . . . . . E - 47

5.1 Commissioning of the NACOS Platinum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 47
5.2 Dimmer – Adjusting the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 47
5.2.1 Adjusting the Backlight Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 47
5.2.2 Adjusting the View Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 48
5.2.3 Adjusting the LED Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 48
5.2.4 Adjusting the Background Lighting (Bridge Panel Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 48
5.3 Basic Panel Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 49
5.3.1 Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 49
5.3.2 [ESC] Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 49
5.3.3 [ENT] Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 50
5.3.4 Arrow Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 50
5.3.5 [STOP HORN] & [ALARM ACKN] Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 50
5.3.6 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 50
5.4 Entering Values on DAP Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 52
5.4.1 Entering Alphanumeric Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 52
5.4.2 Entering Time Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 53
5.4.3 Entering Date Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 53
5.5 Selecting Alarm Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 53
5.6 Password Protection – Privileged Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 55
5.6.1 Entering a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 55
5.7 Basic Mode (DAP, LOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 56
5.8 Alarm List (DAP, LOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 57
5.9 Displaying Various Lists (DAP, LOP) [ADD. LISTS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 58
5.9.1 Suppressed – Manual & Automatic Cut-Outs/Simulations (DAP, LOP) . . E- 59
5.9.2 Fail – List of Sensor and Device Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 60
5.9.3 Alarms – Specific Alarm Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 60
5.10 Display Channel (DAP, LOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 61
5.10.1 Selecting a Channel by Entering the Channel ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 62
5.10.2 Selecting a Channel Stepping Through Lists (Step Analog or Step All) . E- 62
5.10.3 Selecting a Channel from an Alarm or Cut-Out List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 63
5.10.4 Viewing Channel Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 64
6 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

OI_ANC2010_TOC.fm /14.12.2011
5.10.5 Printing Channel Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 66

5.10.6 Adjusting Channel Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 67
5.10.7 Adjusting Channel Parameters – Manual Cut-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 68
5.10.8 Adjusting Channel Parameters – Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 69
5.11 Watch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 71
5.11.1 Select as WS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 71
5.11.2 Attended / Unattended WS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 72
5.12 Duty (not LOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 74
5.12.1 Duty – Panel Setup (Cabin Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 75
5.12.2 Duty – Panel Setup (Public Room Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 76
5.12.3 Duty – System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 76
5.12.4 Duty – Deadman Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 77
5.12.5 Duty – Duty Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 77
5.12.6 Duty – Backup Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 80
5.13 Assist Call (DAP, LOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 82
5.13.1 Calling One Crew Member for Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 82
5.13.2 Calling a Group of Persons for Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 84
5.13.3 Display of an Assist Call in Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 84
5.13.4 Stopping the Assist Call from the Calling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 85
5.14 Printing (WS DAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 85
5.14.1 Alarm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 86
5.14.2 Add. List – Printing Cut-Out and Specific Alarm Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 86
5.14.3 Printer Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 88
5.14.4 Print Manoeuvre Datalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 92
5.14.5 Select Channel – Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 92
5.14.6 Print Datalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 92
5.14.7 Changed Mon. Channel – Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 93
5.14.8 Alm. Sys Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 93
5.14.9 Report Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 93
5.15 Maintenance (DAP, LOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 93
5.15.1 Display Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 95
5.15.2 Version Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 95
5.15.3 Set Time (UTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 95
5.15.4 Setting Local Time and Date (LT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 96
5.15.5 Lamp Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 99
5.15.6 Select UTC/LT – Toggling Between UTC/LT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 99
5.15.7 Commiss Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 100
5.15.9 System PW LEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 101
5.15.10 Watch Dog TST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 102
5.15.11 Store Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 102
5.16 Deadman (DAP, LOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 102
5.16.1 Setting up the Deadman System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 102
5.16.2 Displaying the Deadman System Status on a Resetting Panel . . . . . . E - 104
5.16.3 Resetting the Deadman Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 104
5.16.4 Deadman Alarm Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 105
5.17 Processing Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 105
5.17.1 Alarm Processing – Attended WS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 106
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) 7

OI_ANC2010_TOC.fm /14.12.2011
5.17.2 Duty Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 107

5.17.3 Processing an All Operators Call . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 108
5.17.4 Processing a Deadman Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 109
5.17.5 Processing a Fire Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 109
6 Operating Instructions for the MFDs (PC-Stations) . . . . . . . . E - 111

6.1 Operating the MCS Platinum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 113
6.1.1 Keyboard Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 113
6.2 MCS Platinum GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 114
6.2.1 MCS Platinum Permanent Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 115
6.2.2 MCS Platinum Non-Permanent Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 116
6.3 Alarm System Status Field Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 117
6.3.1 Selecting an MFD as Watch Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 118
6.3.2 Setting the Attended/Unattended Status of the Watch Station . . . . . . E - 118
6.3.3 Defining Duty and Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 119
6.3.4 Cabin Assignment – Adjusting Selection Options for Duty and Backup E - 119
6.4 Deadman Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 120
6.5 Alarms Expander and Alarms List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 120
6.6 Measurements Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 122
6.7 Mimics (Display Expander) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 123
6.7.1 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 126
6.8 Lists (Display Expander) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 127
6.9 Trend (Display Expander) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 128
6.10 Alarm Acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 129
6.11 Processing Alarms Using MCS Platinum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 130
7 Quick Reference – Functional Modes and Menus of Panels . . E - 133

7.1 [DIMMER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 133
7.2 [ALARM LIST] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 133
7.3 [ADD. LISTS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 134
7.3.1 [ADD. LISTS] on DAP (not LOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 134
7.3.2 [ADD. LISTS] on LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 134
7.4 [DISPLAY CHANNEL] and [ADJUST CHANNEL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 135
7.4.1 [DISPLAY CHANNEL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 135
7.4.2 [ADJUST CHANNEL] (WS or LOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 135
7.5 [WATCH] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 136
7.5.1 [WATCH] on the Watch Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 136
7.5.2 [WATCH] on the Requesting Panel (Select Unattended) . . . . . . . . . . E - 136
7.5.3 [WATCH] on the Acknowledging Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 137
7.6 [DUTY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 137
7.6.1 [DUTY] on a Cabin Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 138
7.6.2 [DUTY] on a Public Room Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 138
7.6.3 [DUTY] on a Bridge / WS Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 139
7.7 [ASSIST CALL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 140
7.7.1 [ASSIST CALL] on the Calling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 140
7.7.2 [ASSIST CALL] on a Called Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 140
7.8 [PRINTER CONTROL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 141
7.9 [MAINTENANCE] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 143
8 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

OI_ANC2010_TOC.fm /14.12.2011
7.10 [DEADMAN] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 144
V ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 1
1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 3
1.1 Colour code for the alarm indications: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 4
1.2 Overview of the alarm window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 6
1.2.1 Example of an alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 7
2 Alarm Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 9
2.1 Behaviour when an Alarm comes up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 10
3 Machinery Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 1
VI LISTS AND INDEXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI - 1
VII DOCUMENT HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VII - 1

1 Document History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VII - 3
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) 9

OI_ANC2010_TOC.fm /14.12.2011
10 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

OI_ANC2010_TOC.fm /14.12.2011
GENERAL
NACOS Platinum I-1 About these Operating Instructions
1 About these Operating Instructions
Do not forget to read the chapter on general safety measures. This is obligatory
to read! See chapter I - 2 on page 13.
In this chapter, you will find general information about these operating instructions which have been
delivered with your NACOS Platinum. It informs you about:
- I - A i m a n d S c o p e o f t h e s e O p e r a t i n g I n s t r u c t i o n s on page I-4
- I - V a l i d i t y o f t h e s e O p e r a t i n g I n s t r u c t i o n s on page I-5
- I - H o w t o F i n d I n f o r m a t i o n i n t h e O p e r a t i n g I n s t r u c t i o n s on page I-7
- I - T y p o g r a p h i c a l C o n v e n t i o n s on page I-10
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-3

I General.fm / 14.12.11
I-1 About these Operating Instructions NACOS Platinum
1.1 Aim and Scope of these Operating Instructions
The NACOS Platinum must only be operated by persons who have passed the
relevant mandatory training on the respective systems and applications. Only
reading these operating instructions cannot replace such training.
These operating instructions describe how the NACOS Platinum and its software applications work, and
how to operate the applications.
Since the operating instructions are generic, i.e. generally applicable to the ship control system NACOS
Platinum, some information and functions or features described may not be used in your specific instal-
lation. This depends on the customisation of your system. See chapter 3.2 on page I-23. For exact and
specific features of your particular installation, please refer to the relevant order and delivery documents.
I-4 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

1.2 Validity of these Operating Instructions
These instructions are valid for the NACOS Platinum and its applications. Specific safety regulations for
components used in or in combination with the system are not affected by these instructions.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-5

1.3 Availability of these Operating Instructions
Have these operating instructions always at hand on location. If appl., ensure that copies are available
at all relevant operator panels, MFDs and Outstations. You can also access an online version of the oper-
ating instructions directly in the NACOS Platinum system. See chapter "Menu Bar" on page I-56.
I-6 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

1.4 How to Find Information in the Operating Instructions
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-7

1.4.1 Structure of the Operating Instructions
When reading through or skimming through the overall operating instructions, it is always a good idea
to go from general to more specific subjects, i.e. to start with this general part of the operating instruc-
tions and then continue with the part describing the application you wish to learn about. Again, in the
descriptions of the applications, read the introductory chapters before getting into detail. Otherwise you
might miss information which are assumed to be understood in the chapters describing specific details.
The NACOS Platinum Operating Instructions are divided into different parts. The main parts are
numbered using roman numbers. The sections of the main applications like RADAR and ECDIS and
optional applications like Autopilot are labelled using capital latin letters, the sub-sections inside these
sections are numbered using arabic numbers. The documentation of an application can be handled as a
separate document and therefore can also be ordered separately. The structure of the NACOS Platinum
Operating Instructions is as follows:
- I-GENERAL
This is the part you are currently reading. It provides general information which are important in
order to be able to understand the other parts of the operating instructions.
- II-QUICK START GUIDE
Essential information on the individual applications giving a quick overview of important functions.
- Common Functions
- Operating in the Permanant Area
- Navigation Sensors and Instruments
- I I I - M A I N A P P L I C A T I O N S and I V - O P T I O N A L A P P L I C A T I O N S
Descriptions of the main applications and optional applications:
- Common functions
- Operating in the Permanent Area
- Navigation Sensors and
- RADAR
- ECDIS
- ...
- Autopilot (optional)
- ...
- V-ALARMS
Information regarding NACOS Platinum system alarms.
- F-SENSORS
Descriptions on the sensoring equipment installed aboard.
- H-MAINTENANCE
Instructions regarding cleaning, preventive maintenance, regular maintenance.
- VI-LISTS AND INDEXES
Standard key word index, list of figures
I-8 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

1.4.2 How to find Information on Specific Subjects
There will also be the case that you are basically familiar with the NACOS Platinum but only need punc-
tual information on one specific topic or detail. In order to find information on such specific subjects, you
can use the
- List of Contents
- Index of key words
Here, you can look up specific key words. You will also find, e.g. the names of functions, controls,
and keys like [ESC] or [DUTY] at the beginning of the index.
- II-QUICK START GUIDE
Here you will find essential information on the individual applications which will give you a quick
overview of important functions.
- List of Abbreviations
When describing a system like the NACOS Platinum, it is necessary to use terms and expressions
which may be unfamiliar to you in the beginning. Most of the technical terms will be explained to
you as you read your way through the more general chapters, or when reading the chapters on the
specific applications. However, as a general source of information we have provided a list of abbre-
viations. See V I - L I S T S A N D I N D E X E S .
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-9

1.5 Typographical Conventions
The typographical conventions used in the operating instructions are kept simple, but still it is essential
that you are sure to understand their meaning before reading the instructions. The following special signs
are used for specific purposes:
[ ] (square brackets),
< > (triangular brackets),
{ } (curly brackets),
These signs are used as shown in the following examples:
I-10 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

Expression Explanation
[KEY NAME] This convention is used to refer to an operator key on either a panel keypad
(Machinery application), a key on a console’s keyboard, on a computer
keyboard, or on the onscreen keyboard.
The text is the same text as on the respective key. The text can be letters,
digits or signs. Note that the text inside the brackets is written in capital
letters.
Example:
Press [ALARM LIST] to view the Alarm List.
This means that you must press the key with the text "ALARM LIST" written
on it, in order to view the Alarm List.
[KEY] + [2nd KEY] This convention is used to refer to a key combination on the onscreen
keyboard or on a computer keyboard. Example:
Press [ALT]+[F4] to close the window.
This means that you must press and hold the [ALT] key, and while holding the
[ALT] key you have to press [F4].
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] The symbols in the square brackets refer to the respective arrow keys on
operator panels (Machinery application).
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] The symbols in the square brackets refer to the respective arrow keys on a
console’s keyboard, on a computer keyboard, or on the onscreen keyboard.
Abcd List Heading capitalisation and bold typeface are used when directly referring to
names of NACOS Platinum functions and UI elements such as menus, opera-
tional modes, reports, lists, etc.
The text can be in more than one word.
Examples:
Select Color & in the main menu.
From any mode you can call up the Alarm List by pressing the [ALARM LIST]
key on the panel.
Main > Submenu This is an abbreviated way for:

> Sub-Submenu Click on Main, then on Submenu and afterwards on Sub-Submenu
☞ This symbol indicates a hint.
<variable> Describes a text string of variable length and contents.

The text inside the brackets is not the actual text, but a reference to a text
which is individual to your specific system.
The length of the text is not specified by the text inside the brackets.
The expression can refer to both text and numbers.
Example:
The display will show <duty engineer>.
This means that the display will show the name of the selected duty engineer,
e.g. "3RD ENGINEER".
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-11

Expression Explanation
{nnn} Describes a number with a fixed number of digits which is input or output.
The number of letters inside the brackets describes the number of digits. The
number must not include any decimal point.
Example:
Enter a channel number in the format {nnn}.
This means that you must enter the number of a unit as a three digit number,
without any decimal point.
NOTE:
You have to use zeros (0) to fill the empty spaces, if the number is less than
100 (e.g. 056)
{nnn.} Like {nnn}, but there may be a decimal point at any place in the number, or
none.
Example
The value is displayed in the format {nnnn.}.
In the example the value may be, e.g. "12.35" or "450.6" or "0045". When
entering such values, the decimal point will sometimes be preset by the
system.
DD-MMM-YYYY The date in international format which is used in the system.

Example: 21 AUG 2009 for the 21st of August 2009.
HH:MM:SS The time format used in the system. The 24 hour format is used.
Examples: 06:30:00 stands for half past six and 0 seconds in the morning
(6:30 am) and 23:58:00 is two minutes to midnight.
Table I / 1 Typographical conventions in these operating instructions
I-12 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

NACOS Platinum I-2 Safety Precautions
2 Safety Precautions
This chapter describes general safety measures to be taken into account when working with or on the
NACOS Platinum. In the chapters describing the applications of the NACOS Platinum you will find further
important safety notes and warnings which are specific to the applications.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-13

I-2 Safety Precautions NACOS Platinum
2.1 Warnings and Notes in these Operating Instructions
The warning levels and styles differ slightly from the suggestions of the ANSI Z.535 standard. We delib-
erately decided to use a three-level system of warnings in these operating instructions which is a mix of
ANSI and ISO standards, and which is very explicit and comprehensible. The different warning levels
have the following meaning:
This sign is used whenever severe injuries or even death will occur as conse-
quence of un-awareness or disregard of the described safety rules.
This sign is used whenever severe injuries or even death may occur as conse-
quence of un-awareness or disregard of the described safety rules.
This sign is used when special care must be taken to prevent unexpected conse-
quences such as damage to equipment, incorrect or incalculable operation and
behaviour of equipment.
☞ Notes & Hints: This symbol indicates useful notes and hints which will ease understanding the
system or speed up operation.
I-14 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

2.2 Meaning of Safety Signs
The operating instructions use the following safety signs which you will also find on equipment. Their
meaning is described shortly in order to give you an idea of the importance and the specific aspects to
be aware of.
HIGH VOLTAGE!
In case that the equipment is in use, dangerous voltages are present. Touching
live parts of devices energised with these voltages will result severe injuries or
even death. Appropriate actions must be taken. Before starting to work, observe
the following safety rules:
1. Switch off the equipment, disconnect the equipment from the mains
supply.
2. Take precautions against inadvertent re-connection.
3. To verify that circuits are dead and no voltage is present perform the
appropriate measurements.
4. Ground and short-circuit.
5. Cover live parts in the proximity or otherwise protect them against
touching.
The dangerous voltages are no longer present.
Voltage may only be applied to components being worked on when this is
expressly prescribed (e.g. during troubleshooting). Mains switches are live even
when the equipment is switched off. During work always observe the relevant
regulations for the prevention of accidents, e.g. German VBG 4, or EN 292. Only
use suitable, intact tools and measuring instruments!
DANGER! WORK IN PROGRESS! DO NOT SWITCH!

The switch(es) marked with this sign must never be operated.
Severe injuries or even death can occur as consequence of disregard.
The sign will have amendments like the name of the person who has marked the
switch(es) and time/date of mounting of the sign.
Only the person stated on the sign may remove the sign and operate the
switch(es).
TURNING DEVICES!
Marked devices or devices in the vicinity of this sign may start turning automati-
cally if the equipment is in use. Always switch off the respective equipment or
drives of the devices. Take precautions to prevent inadvertent reactivation of the
devices before you start to work on the devices.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-15

WARNING! ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION!
Marked devices or devices in the vicinity of this sign may emit electromagnetic
radiation that can cause injury. Always switch off the respective equipment. take
precautions to prevent inadvertent reactivation before you start to work on the
devices. Observe the radiation danger zone of radar antennas. See table A / 1.
ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES!

Devices marked with this sign are extremely sensitive with regards to electrostatic
discharge (ESD). They may be handled only by qualified personnel who must take
the appropriate actions to avoid discharges.
NACOS Platinum components contain electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe precautions for handling.
The discharge of electrostatic energy into a semiconductor can destroy the semiconductor or change its
properties. Before a respective unit’s housing is opened to remove or touch a board, the service equip-
ment, Order No. 586-5011, must be used:
1. The mat must be positioned at the workplace.
2. The added potential equalization cable must be connected to the snap fastener and the clamp to a
suitable protective earth contact. The cable contains a 1 MW resistor which must not be removed.
3. The wrist band must be put on. When the spiral cable is connected to the snap fastener, the
discharge line is established.
4. Thoroughly grounded soldering, measurement and test tools must be used. If these tools are
supplied with power from the 230 VAC mains, this supply must be protected by a fault current plug,
stock No. 593-8099.
Boards and units that contain ESD-sensitive semiconductors are marked with the symbol shown above.
All assisting persons who might come into contact with the endangered ESD-sensitive boards must also
use the ESD equipment.
I-16 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

2.3 General Safety Notes – NACOS Platinum
You are obliged to read these operating instructions prior to operation and to
adhere to the operating instructions in operation in order to prevent possible
danger and to ensure compliance with the designated use of the equipment.
Prevention of danger includes that operator personnel are trained and authorised
for safe operation of the equipment. We assume no liability for damage due to
improper operation which could have been prevented.
NOTE:
Further potential danger when working with and on the NACOS Platinum is
described in the respective sections on these processes.
As a very general rule, keep your workplace clean and tidy, it helps preventing accidents! Ensure unob-
structed access to all workstations, operator panels, controls, and relevant switchgear cabinets in order
to enable instant response to alarms!
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-17

2.4 Authorisation and Qualification of Personnel
Only authorised persons may operate the NACOS Platinum.

Danger for persons, things and the environment in case of improper operation or
maintenance and repair of the NACOS Platinum.
Only authorised persons are permitted to carry out cleaning and maintenance
work, or troubleshooting on the NACOS Platinum!
Persons authorised to operate the system are specially instructed and trained operating personnel of the
user. Persons authorised to carry out cleaning, maintenance, and troubleshooting are the specially
trained and skilled personnel of the user as well as SAM Electronics personnel being qualified by training,
knowledge and experience. Persons operating or servicing the NACOS Platinum must be familiar with the
general safety regulations and specific safety systems and they must have passed all required training
and must have read the relevant operating instructions and manuals before starting work.
I-18 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

2.5 Commissioning
DANGER! WORK IN PROGRESS! DO NOT SWITCH!

It is not permissible to connect the ship’s mains to the system before setting-to-
work by a qualified and authorised person. The mains must be switched off (e.g.
by means of a common isolating switch or a circuit breaker) in the ship’s supply
or the mains cable must be disconnected until commissioning is carried out.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-19

2.6 Obligatory Safety Inspection
Inspect and survey the safety systems at intervals prescribed by the responsible classification society or
other relevant authorities.
I-20 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

NACOS Platinum I-3 NACOS Platinum System Description
3 NACOS Platinum System Description
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-21

I-3 NACOS Platinum System Description NACOS Platinum
3.1 What is the NACOS Platinum?
The NACOS Platinum is the state-of-the-art integrated Navigation-Automation-Control-System from

SAM Electronics. It consists of separate applications which form the desired specific system installed on
a ship. In an installation, the set of applications may range from a stand-alone RADAR installation to a
full-featured comprehensive installation.
The NACOS Platinum design is the result of the efforts of a multidisciplinary usability team consisting of
specialists from SAM Electronics, Chalmers University (Gothenburg, Sweden) and TNO Human Factors
(Soesterberg, The Netherlands). In addition to high quality and reliability of the cost-effective solution,
the main focus of the NACOS Platinum is on usability, modularity and scalability, ease of installation,
commissioning and servicing, as well as integration with third-party systems.
NACOS Platinum products serve a large variety of possible installations in a professional shipborne envi-
ronment ranging from stand-alone RADAR installations meeting the minimum requirements aboard up to
complex installations on a large ship including RADAR, ECDIS, Route Planning, Conning, Machinery and
various other applications to navigate the ship safely, and reliably to monitor and control the processes
aboard.
The applications of the NACOS Platinum are operated using standardised workstations. The workstations
will be called Multi Functional Display (MFD) further on. See chapter I - 4 on page 27. MFDs are the
standardised operating consoles used as MMI to the NACOS Platinum. They are based on PCs running
under Windows 7. From a MFD, you will have access to the applications installed in your NACOS Platinum
so that the workplaces aboard are standardised. All applications can be made available at any MFD. See
chapter I - 3.2 on page 23.
Fig. I / 1 MFD console design
The full suite of NACOS Platinum applications and possibly integrated third-party products provide the
user with the required information and control functions and thus essentially support the user in
performing the assigned tasks both in everyday routines and in difficult situations or in case of problems.
The vast amount of information resulting from the ship's operation is always presented in a well-struc-
tured and concise manner so that users will have a clear overview of the ship's situation at all times.
I-22 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

3.2 Customisation
Your NACOS Platinum has been customised by SAM Electronics according to the ship-specific require-
ments which were specified when the system was ordered. In this context, customising means installing
the required hardware and setting up the configuration of the hardware according to the ship-specific
requirements.
Customisation covers the selection of available applications to meet your specific requirements but also
involves adaptations regarding the individual applications. For example, the number of operator panels
used in the Machinery application can be individually configured. This is done using special system tools
which are used by SAM Electronics engineers and technicians only, and documented in the delivery docu-
ments.
Hence, in these operating instructions, the words "customisation" and "configuration" refer to the
customisation provided by SAM Electronics, unless specific NACOS Platinum functions such as, e.g., the
printer configuration are dealt with. For exact and specific features and functional scope of your particular
installation, please refer to the relevant order and delivery documents.
NACOS Platinum products serve a large variety of possible installations in a professional shipborne envi-
ronment ranging from stand-alone RADAR installations meeting the minimum requirements aboard to
complex installations on a large ship including RADAR, ECDIS, Route Planning, Conning, Machinery (Auto-
mation) and various other applications to navigate the ship safely, and to monitor and control the proc-
esses aboard.
Installation, customisation, configuration, as well as initial startup are carried out by SAM Electronics
according to the order specifications upon delivery of the NACOS Platinum. Thus, this is not covered by
these operating instructions. The actual installation aboard a ship is always specifically customised to the
individual needs. The scalability of the NACOS Platinum enables individual systems across the entire
product range, e.g. a the minimum ship configuration in the figure below, the so-called IMO set:
IP Radar Bridge Bridge IP Radar
Outstation Outstation
Fig. I / 2 Minimum installation – IMO set
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-23

At a higher expansion stage, a small-ship configuration could include RADAR as well as Navigation &
Automation:
I P Radar IP Radar
ECR
Bridge Bridge
Outstation Outstation
Fig. I / 3 Example of a small-ship installation
An example for a complex installation on a large ship is shown in the following figure below:
IP Radar IP Radar IP Radar
ECR ECR
Bridge Bridge Bridge Bridge O ffice Office
Gat eway to Infotainment
Gateway to CCTV
Outst ation Outstation Outstation O utstation Outstation

Gateway to Communications
Gateway to Admin/C4
Fig. I / 4 Example of a large-ship installation
I-24 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

3.3 Applicable Standards
This section lists the standards and class rules the NACOS Platinum is complies with. Basically, the
NACOS Platinum meets the relevant IMO INS and IMO IBS requirements. The individual standards are
listed in the following.
Application Applicable standards

RADAR IEC 60945 / IEC 61162 / IEC 62288 / IEC 62388 / MSC.192(79)
ECDIS IEC 60945 / IEC 61162 / IEC 62288 / IEC 61174 / MSC.232(82)
Heading Control System IEC 60945 / IEC 61162 / IEC 62288 / ISO 11674
Track Control System IEC 60945 / IEC 61162 / IEC 62288 / IEC 62065 / MSC.64(69) Annex 2
Table I / 2 Applicable Standards
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-25

I-26 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

NACOS Platinum I-4 Multi Function Display
4 Multi Function Display
This chapter describes the MFD and the relevant peripheral devices which are required or optional equip-
ment to operate the NACOS Platinum.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-27

I-4 Multi Function Display NACOS Platinum
4.1 General System Description MFD
The NACOS Platinum applications are operated using standardised MFDs. A MFD is based on a Personal
Computer running under Windows 7 which is used for input and output of data of the NACOS Platinum
using the graphical user interface (GUI) of Windows. From a MFD, you will have access to the applica-
tions installed in your NACOS Platinum. The GUI handling is the same on each MFD, i.e. the workplaces
aboard are standardised. All applications can be made available at any MFD. See chapter 3.2 on page I-
23.
MFDs are installed in the consoles aboard, and they are equipped with a 22" or 26’’TFT monitor and a
trackball. Optionally, MFDs can also be equipped with mouse and keyboard. See chapter 4.2 on page I-
29.
Fig. I / 5 MFD
The GUI is based on Microsoft Windows 7. However, you do not have direct access to Windows so that
the MFD cannot be used like a normal PC, e.g. to install software and run applications other than the
applications related to the NACOS Platinum.
In these operating instructions, we assume that you are reasonably familiar with basic Windows functions
such as window operations, dialogue handling, menu and button operation, selecting list items or
options, and so on. Nevertheless, many of the screen elements and basic operations are explained in
these operating instructions. See chapter 5 on page I-45, which explains features which are specifically
important for operation of the NACOS Platinum.
When the MFD is started, a basic screen is displayed, which is referred to as Super Home from where
you have access to all functions and information which are available on the specific MFD. If the MFD is
already running, select Super Home from the main menu or click in the menu bar to switch to Super
Home. See chapter 5.1 on page I-46.
I-28 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

4.2 Operating Devices
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-29

4.2.1 Pointing Devices – Trackball and Mouse
All user interface controls are operated by the mouse or trackball which is connected to the respective
MFD. Even if you are already familiar with using input devices like mouse or trackball, you will find one
or the other important note in this section.
DO key MORE key
No function MORE key... Scroll wheel
DO key
Built-in Desktop Mouse

trackball trackball
Fig. I / 6 Possible pointing devices
To start an operating step move the pointer on the screen by moving the trackball or mouse. Move the
pointer to the desired position on the screen, e.g. to a text item, a numerical value, a symbol, or any
desired position e.g. on the PPI. The shape of the pointer changes when you point at different elements
on screen. The pointer’s shape depends on the application and the element you point at. See chapter I
- 5.10 on page 82.
When you point at a click-sensitive (clickable) element on screen then you can press and release (click)
one of the trackball keys to display information or activate a function. The possible types of clicks are
explained separately. See chapter I - on page 31. The specific effect of clicking depends on the key
used, the element you clicked, and the operating situation. This is described in the specific parts of these
operating instructions. Desktop trackball or mouse have two different buttons, DO and MORE key. The
functions of the DO and MORE keys are described in the following.
DO Key
The most frequently used of the keys is the DO key, i.e. the middle key on the built-in trackball and the
left button of the desktop trackball and mouse. Most elements on screen respond to this key by opening
a menu from which you can select frequently used functions.
☞ In these operating instructions, "clicking" always means pressing the DO key. When you have to
press the MORE key or the right mouse/trackball button, this will be explicitly explained in the
instructions.
I-30 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

MORE Keys
On the built-in trackballs the two keys are situated above the DO key, The right one is called MORE
key. The left key has no function. On the desktop trackball and mouse, this is the right button. The func-
tions of the MORE key depend on the element you point at on screen. In some cases pressing the MORE
key opens menus, in other cases additional information are displayed. However, not all elements which
can be operated by means of the DO key will also respond to the MORE key.
Scroll Wheel
If a scroll wheel is available, it can be used to scroll down lists or to zoom into or out of charts. Only
mouse and desktop trackball may be equipped with a scroll wheel.
Types of Clicks
In NACOS Platinum you point at elements on screen and click or press the MORE key to display infor-
mation or cause action. The following types of clicks are possible:
Click Explanation
Single click of Perform action. This means pressing and immediately releasing again the
left key or DO key DO key of the built-in trackball, or the left mouse or trackball key respec-
tively.
When you click on a button, this will start a process or open a dialogue.
when you click on dropdown menus, this will open the menu. In a menu,
to select an item, click on the item with a single click. A single click will also
select and thus highlight an entry in a list.
Double-click of In tables, a double-click will open a cell for editing. A cursor is displayed,
left key or DO key and you can change the respective value like a text field. Editing resembles
editing cells in Microsoft Excel. An example for such a table is a waypoint
list that contains the waypoint number, name, position and some other
properties, which you can change in that table by double-clicking on the
cells.
When you click on a folder icon in folder structures, which you will find,
e.g., in the Machinery application, a double-click opens that folder and lists
the subordinated contents.
Press the MORE key or Get information, in many cases via a context menu. This is used for
right-click using mouse or providing you with object-specific menu items, such as menus for properties
desktop trackball and maintenance. These functions also provide access to adjustments,
particularly in the Machinery application. Examples are: acknowledging
alarms, displaying properties, etc.
Table I / 3 Types of clicks in NACOS Platinum
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-31

4.2.2 Keyboard
To enter alphanumerical values and also to operate the user interface, the MFD may be equipped with
a membrane keyboard, which is integrated in the console.
Fig. I / 7 Keyboard of a console
In some cases, an optional external keyboard is provided. For that purpose, a standard PC keyboard is
used. Depending on the application you are working with, the function keys in the top row may have
special functions. Please refer to the relevant descriptions of the individual applications. For example, in
the RADAR applications, function keys have different functions than in the Machinery application.
If no external keyboard is available at all, values can also be entered using the so-called onscreen
keyboard which is an optional feature of the NACOS Platinum user interface. However, this depends on
customisation. There may be a separate icon for the onscreen keyboard.
Fig. I / 8 Onscreen keyboard
You can use this keyboard to enter text and numeric values or press function keys, just as you do when
you use the physical PC keyboard. The onscreen keyboard thus emulates the PC keyboard and it can be
used if, for whatever reason, the PC keyboard does not work. Simply click on the buttons to enter the
respective letter or number, or activate the respective function of the key.
Note: For the RADAR application the left part and for the TRACKPILOT the right part of the MFD console
can be equipped with a dedicated keyboard panel. See the respective chapters for details.
I-32 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

4.2.3 The ASCII Keyboard
Backlight dimming
Fig. I / 9 The Optional ASCII Keyboard
The MFD can be equipped with a ASCII keyboard in the console. It works like a common computer
keyboard, except for the fact that the backlight can be dimmed and that the location of the key-groups
is different and that the location of the key-groups is different.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-33

4.2.4 The RADAR Keyboard
Fig. I / 10 The RADAR Keyboard
I-34 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

4.2.5 The TRACKPILOT Keyboard
Fig. I / 11 The Trackpilot Keyboard
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-35

4.3 TFT Monitor
The NACOS Platinum user interface is displayed on a 22" or 26’’ TFT monitor which is an integrated part
of the MFD. The monitor is switched on and off automatically together with the MFD. To adjust the
monitor’s settings, use the software functions and controls provided. See chapter I - 5.3.1 on page 52.
I-36 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

4.3.1 Nominal Viewing Distance
The monitors are designed according to IEC 62388. In chapter 6.13.2 of this test standard a maximum
pixel pitch of 0.29 mm per metre of nominal viewing distance (1 min of arc) is required. Both monitors
have a pixel pitch of less than 0.29 mm. The requirement is fullfilled.
Further-on above standard references to IEC 60945, Clause 4, where a minimum text height is required
with 3.5 mm per metre of nominal viewing distance and at least 11 pixels.
The RADARPILOT as well as CHARTPILOT application provide text heights on both monitors (independent
of monitor size) as follows:
- "Large font with 5.5 mm
- "Medium size font with 4.5 mm
- "Normal size font with 3.5 mm
- "Small font with 2.5 mm
The small font is not used for navigation related tasks.
☞ The normal size font is used for navigation and determines the nominal viewing distance with 1
metre for both monitors.
This is sufficient for sitting positions in front of one of the workstations (typically 0.8 metre) as well as
for a standing position in front of the centre steering console (typically 1.0 metre). In this case the
console has a depth of max. 0.8 metre.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-37

4.3.2 Colour Distortions on Monitors with Flat Screens (TFT Monitors)
If the display content on a TFT monitor has remained unchanged for a long period of time and is then
replaced by a different display, an effect can occur which is known as "ion spotting" in the case of
cathode ray tubes: the previous display is still faintly visible in the form of discoloration. In the case of
TFT monitors, in contrast to monitors with cathode ray tubes, this effect is reversible and therefore
cannot be regarded as a defect. If the monitor is operated for a long time (several hours or days) with
a different display, the discoloration disappears.
I-38 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

4.3.3 Printers
For the different printouts of the NACOS Platinum, two different types of printers are required:
- Line printers for logs and other continually printed lists
- Page printers for complete reports which are printed in one go
Refer to the parts of the operating instructions describing the individual applications.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-39

4.4 Startup and Shutdown of MFDs
As long as the ship is at sea and in operation, the NACOS Platinum must be fully
operational, i.e. the NACOS Platinum and its applications must not be shut down.
UPS systems must not be deactivated.
☞ The NACOS Platinum and the related consoles and the electronics equipment are permanently up
and running. They are only completely shut down by qualified authorised service personnel in case
of servicing and repair. The system components are then separated from the mains using a main
switch on the bridge. When switching on the mains supply again, the equipment will startup auto-
matically without further user action.
This section describes how to use the shut-down function, if this is required, e.g. if the power supply has
to be switched off during a dockyard period, or if an individual MFD shall be switched off for specific
reasons. Proceed as follows to switch off a MFD:
1. Press [Alt] + [F4], or click the Menu button and then Shut Down.
2. Enter the required password.
3. In the window which is displayed, select Shut Down and click OK.
The other options Reboot or Log off can be used to re-boot the MFD immediately or to log off
and on again.
4. Separate the unit from the mains using the mains switch on the bridge.
This way, the NACOS Platinum program is terminated and the PC is shut down. The display will be
switched off automatically.
Never switch off a MFD without having completed the described shutdown proce-
dure. The TFT display will probably function in a normal manner when just
switching off the power and then switching it on again. However, and this applies
to all types of PCs used: if, at the moment it is switched off, the PC accesses the
hard disk, the hard disk might be permanently damaged resulting in system
failure of the MFD and loss of data.
To switch on the MFD use the main power switch (if appl., refer to the drawings in the delivery docu-
ments). It will automatically start up and run in normal operating state, Super Home is displayed. If the
MFD is already up and running and displaying a screensaver, just move the trackball slightly to display
the graphical user interface of the MFD.
I-40 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

4.5 Basic Settings
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-41

4.5.1 Adjusting the Display
Use the brightness control symbols in the title bar( and ), in the Brilliance/Data Area menu or the
keys on the console to toggle between the available color schemes. See chapter I - 5.3.1 on page 52.
With these keys any manual setting done with the sliders is reset to the factory-set default values.
A MORE-click on the symbols opens the Brilliance/Data
Area menu.
With the Brilliance slider, the overall brilliance of the monitor
can be set. In parallel, the brightness of the backlight illumi-
nation of the radar and/or TRACKPILOT keyboard is set. It is
not possible do dim the ASCII-keyboard from here.
With the Data Area slider, the brightness of the elements of
the sidebar can be set seperately.
The symbols and have the same functions as described above.
The corresponding keys on the console are:

☞ If the screen appears completely dark due to a brilliance d Æ
setting which is unsuitable for the actual ambient light
and the symbols are no longer visible, just move the Brilliance
mouse pointer into the top left corner and press a few
times the DO button. Brilliance will light up again.
☞ In the PPI/or chart area the brilliance of the scales or the user symbols can be set seperately. Use
a MORE-click in the PPI/or chart area in order to open the context menu and set the appropriate
sliders.
I-42 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

4.5.2 Setting Date and Time
Both date and time will be displayed permanently in the title bar: .
Fig. I / 12 Date and Time Display
The symbol indicates that external synchronization of system time is not available – so that system
time is running on the internal clock in the time-master DPU. Once the external time source becomes
available again, the time is adjusted accordingly, and the red symbol dissapears.
To set Date/Time klick on the small arrow at the very right. A

dialog window opens.
The operation of the controls is self-explanatory, do not forget to
klick on Set after having corrected the values in order to apply
them to the system.
Click on Close to leave the dialog.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-43

I-44 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

NACOS Platinum I-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface
5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface
This section describes the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of the NACOS Platinum. This includes the basic
screen layout starting from the moment the system is first switched on, as well as the basic screen
elements and controls, general screen navigation, and how to switch between the individual NACOS Plat-
inum applications.
☞ The descriptions of the user interface in this chapter start from very general, i.e. with the big areas
and elements on screen which are then broken down to detailed explanations on specific items on
screen in the subsequent sections. If you are not familiar at all with the basic Windows controls and
mouse/trackball pointers, it might be useful to read the respective sections before starting here. See
chapter I - 5.9 on page 69.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-45

I-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface NACOS Platinum
5.1 Super Home
Super Home is the first screen that is displayed on screen after start-up of the MFD. Super Home will
help you in quickly starting the main applications, and provide help in finding specific functions through
the homepages of the individual applications. When you are working with the system, you can return to
Super Home by using the Super Home shortcut in the main menu or the button. Super Home
provides links to:
- All main applications´ homepages: RADAR, ECDIS monitoring, ECDIS planning, Conning and
Machinery / Automation home
- Secondary applications like AIS, Autopilot, Maintenance and possibly third party applications
- Documents that help you getting started.
Super Home has a title bar and menu bar. Clicking on the button will open the Super Home page
regardless of the current active application. Title bar and menu bar are described separately. See chapter
5.3 on page I-51.
Main
applications
Quick access to
additional infor-
mation
Logical groups
and additional
applications
Fig. I / 13 Example of Super Home
The top row of applications of the Super Home page displays the main or primary applications that are
installed in the system, in the example: RADAR, ECDIS, Machinery, and Conning. The thumbnail pictures
of the applications are clickable and will link to the respective application. For example, if you click on
the RADAR thumbnail, this will open the RADAR application.
The first link below the thumbnail of a main application is the link to the homepage of the application.
Additional links will lead you to important functions in the applications. The second line of thumbnails
contains shortcuts to groups of functionality that are considered a logical group or additional application.
For familiarization with the product, it is possible to select from the quick-links.
- Take the Tour opens a presentation in which the advantages and functionality of the PLATINUM
are presented.
I-46 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

5.2 Screen Layout
The main page of an application consists of two main areas: the sidebar and the application area. The
sidebar on the left provides access to details and functions of the applications. The sidebar is described
separately. See chapter 5.3 on page I-51. The application area located on the right shows the main
window of the active application. It can show the radar PPI, the ECDIS chart or Machinery mimics etc.
The general behaviour of the application area is described separately. See chapter 5.4 on page I-59.
Sidebar
Fig. I / 14 General screen layout of the NACOS Platinum (RADAR Mode)
The general screen layout, especially the size of the different areas, may vary betwen the different avail-
able applications.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-47

5.2.1 Title Bar
The title bar provides information and functions which are permanently available in the system.
Fig. I / 15 NACOS Platinum title bar of RADAR application
The figure above shows an example of the title bar with the RADAR application being the active appli-
cation. The information and functions provided are explained in the following.
5.2.1.1 Brilliance
You can use the / buttons in the top left corner to toggle between the available
color schemes for different ambient light conditions. Alternatively you can use the keys
on the console or the appropriate entry in the menu.
Five different color schemes are available for different ambient light conditions. The
brilliance is toggled between 5%, 20%, 60%, 80% and 100%.
The Data Area brilliance setting is not affected by these cobtrols. But it changes accordingly, because
the brilliance setting is relevant for the whole screen.
☞ The brilliance of the monitor does not change stepwise, in fact it changes smoothly from the
previous setting to the actual desired value.
100% 20%
Fig. I / 16 Color schemes of the Color & settings
The buttons are located in the top left corner which is easy to remember. This way, when the screen is
hardly readable due to changing light conditions, you will be easily able to find the / buttons at
the fixed and easy to find location.
I-48 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

However, you can also individually adjust the brilliance of the

screen. If you press the MORE key (right-click) on the /
button to open the Brilliance menu. To adjust the settings,
click on the right or left of the slider or drag the slider. The new
value is shown on the right and the screen’s settings are
adjusted accordingly.
☞ There are no knobs or other controls on the monitor(s) to adjust the brightness.
The use of the brightness controls may inhibit visibility of information, particularly when
using the night color tables!
5.2.1.2 Active Application Title
The title bar displays the name of the application which is currently active in the application area, e.g.
Fig. I / 17 Active Application Title
5.2.1.3 Date and Time
Both date and time will be displayed permanently in the title bar:
5.2.1.4 Alive Indication
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-49

There are different possibilities available to verify the alive status of the MFD which are listed and
explained below.
The Time Display

The system provides feedback that it is still active and operating, i.e. alive. This is specifically indicated
on each MFD in the title bar of the HMI by the seconds changing in the time display.
If picture freeze occurs, all data on the screen as well as the display of the seconds will be frozen, so
that the operator is able to notice this fault.
The Cursor and HMI

Picture freeze caused by the computer or the graphics adapter of the MFD can also be recognized by the
fact that moving the trackball or the mouse does no longer change the cursor position on the screen.
If the computer or its application software has a severe fault it can also happen that the cursor is still
moving but a click on any HMI element (for instance an operable button on the screen) is no longer
working correctly.
The RADAR Video

The transmission of the radar video from a connected transceiver to the MFD is monitored continuously.
If the connection to the transceiver is disturbed or completely lost, the respective alarm messages
describing the reason for the fault are given (See chapter 7.15 on page A-81 for details).
If the refresh of the radar video is not possible, the alarm No RADAR Video is issued; the video in the
PPI is cleared and will no longer be updated.
If no such alarm is indicated and you want to check the alive status of the radar transmission and the
PPI update you should switch off all signal processing of the radar video, increase the video gain to
maximum in order to visualize all targets and eventually clutter in the vicinity, or - as a minimum - make
the video noise visible on the PPI. If the video noise is visible and is changing at each antenna rotation,
this part of the system is alive and operable.
In order to make the rotating antenna sweep visible, you can
- "Step up and down with the radar range, or
- "Change the video gain between minimum and maximum.
In both cases the update of the video sectors on the PPI should be observable.
The Monitor
A green LED at the lower right corner of the MFD monitor indicates the running connection to the MFD
computer. If the connection is lost or disturbed, the LED will stay green but start flashing once per
second and the screen will normally become dark. If the LED changes to orange the monitor is in stand-
by mode waiting for sync signal, red indicates the switched off status. The LED will flash red in case of
excessive temperatures.
I-50 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

5.3 Sidebar
The width of the sidebar in each application is fixed, but it varies from application to application. The
sidebar consists of a permanent area, a non-permanent area, title bar and a menu bar, which are
explained in the following sub-sections.
Title bar
Permanent area
Alarms Expander
TRACKPILOT
Expander
Tabs
Non-permanent area Expanders of the Tab
Menu bar
Fig. I / 18 RADAR sidebar
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-51

5.3.1 Permanent Area
The upper half of the sidebar is the permanent area. It shows status information and controls that are
mandatory according to regulations and thus must be permanently visible. In addition, the permanent
area can show information that is not mandatory but which you would expect to be permanently visible
or that are de facto standards. This area can never be overlapped or hidden by permanent pop-ups or
dialogue windows.
The height of the permanent area varies between the applications since some NACOS Platinum applica-
tions require more permanently visible information that others. For instance, RADAR requires more
permanent controls than the Machinery application. The figure below shows the permanent area of the
RADAR application:
Fig. I / 19 Sidebar – permanent area of the RADAR application
The RADAR application has the largest permanent area in the system since it requires the most manda-
tory controls. The RADAR permanent area is divided into two columns containing various groups. The
following information are provided in the groups:
- Display
containing orientation, motion, range and reference controls.
- Heading and Speed (of own ship).
Drift is not mandatory but it is included based on an early investigation into S-mode requirements.
- Position
- Vector and Trails
- Chart
- Targets
- RADAR
containing the radar transceiver controls
I-52 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

- RADAR Video
containing the video display controls
- Electronic Bearing Lines (EBL), Variable Range Markers (VRM) and Parallel Indes Lines (PI).
Alarm icons in front of a value indicate that the respective value is in alarm or warning status. See
chapter I - 5.9.12 on page 81.
The buttons are push buttons used to toggle between hiding and displaying
the radar video and overlay.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-53

5.3.2 Non-Permanent Area
The lower half of the sidebar is the non-permanent area. It shows status information, parameters, tools
and controls. Some expanders are constantly visible, some can be hidden. See table below for details.
The expanders are grouped and stacked by means of so-called tabs. Click on a tab to view the subordi-
nated expanders. Using expanders you can expand and collapse, i.e. display and hide a variety of views,
controls or setting screens. The height of the non-permanent area is flexible and depends on the size of
the permanent area. If an opened expander exceeds the available space, a scrollbar is provided to scroll
up and down the contents of parts of the non-permanent area or to scroll left/right within parts of
expanders.
The controls displayed in the non-permanent area depend on the active application. For instance, the
RADAR application will display various settings screens. Machinery includes a navigation tool to browse
through large sets of mimic screens. The figure below shows an example of the non-permanent area of
the RADAR and ECDIS application:
Tabs with which the Non-

expanders are stacked permanent
Expanders area
Fig. I / 20 Sidebar – example of the non-permanent area of the RADAR application
The Alarm line expander and the optional TRACKPILOT expander have a permanent bar below the title
bar. This additional permanent bar will display information such as the latest alarm message, ioperating
mode, settings, etc. The general handling and type of expanders are described separately. The detailed
content and functionality of exoanders is part of the different application related chapters.
☞ If you open multiple expanders they often donot fit into the sidebar. In such cases, other expanders
will be closed or cut off at the lower end.
I-54 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

☞ The expanders shown and described in this handbook may vary from the ones visible on your
system. The presence and display of the expanders depends on the system´s configuration. Never-
theless, all possible expanders will be described in this handbook.
Expander Name is always visible / is only visible if the system contains ...
ENC always visible
Target always visible
Route ?
Display always visible
Trackpilot Only visible if an Autopilot is present in the system
Alarms always visible
Measurements ?
Mimics ?
Table I / 4 Visibility of Expanders
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-55

5.3.3 Menu Bar
The menu bar provides functions for navigation between applications and screens in the NACOS Plat-
inum. To open the menu, click on the Menu button in the bottom left corner of the display. The menu
resembles the Start menu of MS Windows 7. The figure below shows an example of a NACOS Platinum
menu which is displayed when clicking on the Menu button:
Shortcuts to
the primary
applications
Search function
The individual buttons and elements are described below. See table I / 5.
Fig. I / 21 Opened NACOS Platinum main menu
☞ When you move the mouse or trackball pointer over the buttons of the menu bar, you will experi-
ence a rollover effect indicating the button you are currently pointing at. This will help you to
pinpoint the right button for the current operating situation even in case of emergency.
I-56 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

The items and functions of the menu bar depend on the configuration. They are described in the
following table:
Menu Item / Button Explanation

When you click on the Menu button, the menu is opened like the Start menu
of MS Windows 7.
When the Show Full Menu Structure option is activated, the list will change
to a tree view showing a complete menu structure in form of a folder struc-
ture. The Option then becomes the Back option, and if you click on the Back
option, the menu returns to the standard variant.
Home The Home button takes you to the Super Home page.
S-mode The S-mode button takes you to a standard settings mode of the current
active application. S-mode for RADAR consists of a specific configuration of
settings according to the relevant standards for RADAR. S-mode is like a
clean-up function that brings the application to a default configuration closing
all manually opened expanders. See chapter II - 1 on page II-3 for details.
Search The Search button opens a text field and places the cursor in that search field
to do a system-wide search. When you start to type in the text or numbers
to be looked up, the menu switches into search result display mode. The
search results are instantly displayed and continuously updated as you type in
the character string.
☞
Full Screen The Full Screen button hides the sidebar. See chapter I - 5.3.3.1 on page 58.
Unhide Sidebar The Unhide Sidebar button restores the sidebar. Only displayed when the
current application is running in Full Screen mode. See chapter I - 5.3.3.1 on
page 58.
Shortcuts, e.g. Shortcuts access the configured main applications, e.g.: RADAR, ECDIS Moni-
toring, ECDIS Planning, and Machinery. There are also shortcuts provided that
access Super Home and the homepages of the main applications.
Super Home Returns to the Super Home window. See chapter 5.1 on page I-46 for
details.
Favorites Using the Favorites you can quickly select specific (favorite or often visited)
screens or application pages.
Help Nothing happens.
About Displays a window with information about the software version etc:
Color & Brightness Nothing happens.
Time & Date The menu window is closed.
Shut Down Use this button to shut down the MFD.

Observe the relevant safety notes! See chapter I - 4.4 on page 40
Table I / 5 Items on the NACOS Platinum main menu
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-57

5.3.3.1 Full Screen Mode
The Full Screen (or hide sidebar) function is a mechanism that switches the display to a full screen view
that shows only the application area, and the sidebar is hidden. However, full screen mode is only avail-
able depending on the application:
- RADAR does not allow the full screen mode.
- ECDIS in monitoring mode does not allow the full screen mode.
- Operating the TRACKPILOT as the TRACKPILOT-Master does not allow the full screen mode.
- Machinery containing alarm displays does not allow the full screen mode.
- Conning allows the full screen mode.
To switch to full screen mode, click on the button (Full Screen) in the menu bar. The sidebar is then
hidden:
Full screen button has become the

Unhide side bar button
Fig. I / 22 ECDIS in full screen mode
In Full Screen mode, only the button becomes the button (Unhide sidebar). No other controls will
be visible. To unhide the sidebar again, simply click on the button in the bottom left corner. The
sidebar will then be restored.
I-58 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

5.4 Application Area
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-59

5.4.1 Application Area Frames
The application area on the right of the sidebar shows the main window
of the active application. It can show the RADAR PPI, the ECDIS chart,
or Machinery mimics etc. The application area can have six different
layout types. The grouped contents are arranged in separate frames.
Fig. I / 23 Application area frames
The sizes of the frames are flexible in some of the operation modes of the MFD. In some applications
the dividers between the frames can be moved to resize the frames, in others not. For that purpose,
click on the divider, hold the button and drag the divider into the desired direction. The picture below
shows an example of a screen with three frames:
Layout Selector
2 3
Fig. I / 24 Example: Machinery screen with three frames
Each frame in a layout can contain multiple tabbed panels that group similar information. See chapter I
- 5.5 on page 62.
Switching Between Layouts

Layouts can be switched by selecting a new layout type using the buttons in the top
right corner of the screen. The currently selected layout is indicated by the white icon. The other layout
types are greyed out.
I-60 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

Switching to More Frames

When you switch to a layout type with more frames than the current layout, e.g. from 1 frame to 2
frames, the existing frames are kept and one or more new frames are added. The new tabs are loaded
with a default content. For that purpose, use the buttons in the title bar of the main
application window.
If the application area has multiple frames, then you can select a
specific frame, in which the tabbed panel will be opened, by pressing
the MORE key (right-clicking) on the tab and selecting the desired
option from the context menu. This behaviour is similar to the Open In
New Tab function in web browsers.
Switching to Different Arrangement of Frames

When you switch to an equal number of frames, e.g. from 2 horizontal to 2 vertical frames, some content
moves. No content is hidden if it is not necessary. Between the two-frames layouts the bottom content
moves to the right frame and vice versa. Between the three-frames layouts the top right content moves
to the bottom right frame and vice versa.
Switching to Less Frames

When you switch to a layout type with less frames than the current layout, e.g. from 3 frames to 2
frames, some frames will be hidden. In addition to choosing a new layout type using the buttons in the
top right corner of the screen, you can also switch to a lower layout type by closing the last tab in a
frame. When the last tab is closed the frame is closed too.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-61

5.5 Tabbed Panels
In the NACOS Platinum applications, information are in many cases grouped on so-called tabbed panels.
Tabbed panels are screen pages which are arranged on top of each other like a pile of paper sheets.
The tabs identify the panels, and they are used to navigate through the panels. The picture below shows
an example:
Layout Selector
Active Tab
Other Tabs
Foremost Tab
1
2 3
Fig. I / 25 Example: Machinery screen with tabbed panels in three frames
The active tab is displayed in the foreground, and it is highlighted, which is e.g. indicated by a blue tab.
The active tabbed panel has the so-called focus. That means that editing, e.g. entering values or
adjusting the display, is only possible on that active tab. The other tabs are displayed as grey text sepa-
rated with a vertical line. When you click on a hidden tab in the background, it is brought to the fore-
ground and becomes the active tab. See table I / 25 above. You can also press [CTRL]+[TAB] on the
keyboard repeatedly to switch from tab to tab. In a multiple-frame-view, the other frames, which do not
have the focus, the front tabs are still highlighted by a grey tab but you will see that only one tab will
be active and have the focus.
Active Tab Behaviour when Switching to Different Layouts

When you switch to a new layout type using the buttons (Layout Selector)
the active tab has the following behaviour. If you switch to a layout type that has...
- One more frame: the new frame becomes the active frame.
- Two or three additional frames: the current active frame stays the active frame.
- The same number of frames: the current active frame moves along with the switching behaviour.
- Less frames: the current active frame remains the active frame unless it is the one which is closed.
In that case the horizontally adjacent frame becomes active.
In all cases the active tabbed panel will be highlighted, indicated by the blue tab.
Note:
I-62 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

In some applications or display modes (e.g. radar) not all views may be available to the operator
Tab Context Menu

When you press the MORE key (right-click) on a tab, this will open the
context menu. Using a tab’s context menu you can specifically adjust
the tabbed panel’s appearance on screen and move it to a different
location on screen.
The following options are available:
- Open in
Displays the contents of the tab in a different frame, which you select in a sub-menu.
- Tear Off
Display the contents of the tab in a new, independent window that can be moved all over the
screen. To make the window a tab again, drag and drop the window by pointing at its upper left
corner and move it back to the tab’s position in the upper left corner of the respective frame.
Torn-off tab
...now displayed as a window
Fig. I / 26 Tab after using tear-off function
- Close
Closes the current tabbed panel.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-63

5.6 Lists & Tables
Wherever useful in NACOS Platinum, system data which have a record structure are displayed in lists,
e.g. alarms, track details, etc. In the following you will find examples of two lists.
Fig. I / 27 Example 1: Target List in RADAR sidebar
The target list shows the the currently tracked radar targets. Using the scrollbar on the right you can
scroll and page up and down the list. The next figure shows an example of the Machinery Alarm List:
Header
Details
pane
Footer
Fig. I / 28 Example 2: Alarm List
Lists have a header, a details pane, and a footer.
I-64 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

List Details Pane

In the top row of the details pane you will find the column headings. You can change
the sorting order by clicking on a column heading. The sorting order is indicated by
a small arrow. For example, the arrow up in the Name column indicates that the list
is sorted by the Name column in alphanumerically ascending order. When you click
on the Name column again, this will revert the sorting order to descending.
In some lists the sorting order is predefined. For example, the Alarm list must be sorted chronologically.
Hence it is predefined that the Alarm list is sorted by the time column in descending order starting with
the oldest alarm. The width of a column can be adjusted by dragging the separator line between two
column headings. In some cases adjusting of width may be disabled. Also showing, hiding and reordering
of columns can be enabled or restricted in the individual case.
List Footer
The footer of a list in some cases contains the number of list entries.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-65

5.7 Dialogues
Dialogues are opened when you click on buttons or they are opened by the system as a response to
actions or events, e.g. in case of error. Message dialogues and popup edit windows need to be differen-
tiated, and they are explained in the following.
I-66 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

5.7.1 Popup Edit Windows
When you wish to adjust a value in the NACOS Platinum, you will in many cases click on an Adjust
button to open a separate popup edit window. Such a window contains:
- Edit fields with a label in front. The edit field will allow input
of text. Also, the small up-down arrows are provided that Click
increments/decrements the value. See chapter I - 5.9.8 on
page 77. In rare cases a slider might also be available. (Example)
- An indication of the range the value can have (for example

0 - 360°).
- OK button and a Cancel button. The OK preferably uses a
more specific verb that is applicable to the specific action,
like 'Adjust' or 'Send'.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-67

5.8 Tooltips
Tooltips are an interface element that is used to provide you with instant information on elements you
see on screen. Tooltips are small text pop-ups which are displayed when you simply point at elements
on screen. After a short delay, a small popup is displayed with a short description informing you about
the function or meaning of the element you pointed at. After a short while, the tooltip is faded out so
that you can see all screen information again.
When you open the menu and move the trackball pointer down the list of menu items, tooltips are
displayed for the individual menu items:
Fig. I / 29 Tooltip of a menu item
☞ Please note that you will not find tooltips on all elements on screen but on important display
elements and controls such as buttons and dropdown menus. Also, many screen objects like the
tools, chart symbols and targets in the PPI of the radar can have tooltips to supply relevant infor-
mation such as distance, bearing and ETA, or the own ship’s position.
I-68 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

5.9 Controls – Adjusting Values
Most of the controls used in the NACOS Platinum applications are very similar to the known controls used
by Microsoft Windows. The picture below shows some examples of the controls:
Field group name Field group, controls for the same topic
See chapter 5.9.2 on page I-71.
Fields
Slider
See chapter 5.9.3 on
page I-72.
Fields with
dropdown menus
Push button
page I-73.
Check boxes
page I-75.
Dropdown menu
page I-74.
Alarm/Warning icon related to the indication

Scrollbar
Expander
Zoom and pan control

Spin boxes See chapter 5.9.10 on page I-79.
Keys for numeric values

Fig. I / 30 Examples of NACOS Platinum controls
The individual controls shown in the figure are described in the following sub-sections.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-69

5.9.1 Fields
In NACOS Platinum, values in form of text, numbers, slider settings, check boxes, etc. are generally
referred to as fields. A field consists of the value and a label, the field name. Some of the fields are read-
only, they only serve for information purposes. In other fields, the values can be adjusted. See chapter
I - 5.9 on page 69.
I-70 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

5.9.2 Field Groups
Field groups are represented on the NACOS Platinum user interface by a thin frame around a number of
fields. The frame indicates that the fields inside it belong together, i.e. that they belong to the same
subject or to a group of related items. Field groups have a name which is a kind of heading for the fields
inside the group.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-71

5.9.3 Sliders
Using sliders you can set a value within a range of possible values. The
current value is indicated as you drag the slider to either side. The
minimum value is 0%, the maximum value is 100%. Simply clicking on
the slider’s handle displays the current value of the slider. Show current value
When you click on the slider next to the current value, this will increase
or decrease the value by 10 or another predefined value.
Decrease value by 10
I-72 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

5.9.4 Push Buttons
Push buttons resemble buttons in the real world. When you press them, something will happen. When
you click on a push button on screen an action will be carried out or details will be displayed. The
purpose of a button is indicated by its label, in some cases tooltips are provided. See chapter I - 5.8 on
page 68.
☞ The Hide Video / Overlay buttons are spring-loaded. They are only
active as long as the appropriate button of the pointing device is
pressed.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-73

5.9.5 Dropdown Menus
Dropdown menus are indicated by a small downward arrow next to a

field. To open the menu, click on the arrow. To select different value for
the field, click the desired item on the dropdown menu. The field is then
updated accordingly. To close the menu without making any changes,
just click on any free area on screen or press the [ESC] button on the
keyboard.
I-74 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

5.9.6 Check Boxes
Check boxes indicate that there is an option that can be set or not. In
the example in the figure on the right, the parallel index lines (PI) 1
to 4 are ticked off, i.e. selected and thus activated. This is indicated
by the small check mark . To select a check box, just click on it so
that it is ticked off. To clear the check box again, click on it so that
the check mark disappears ( ).
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-75

5.9.7 Scroll Bars
Scroll bars are displayed when contents do not fit on the screen or sidebar etc. You can then use scroll
bars to move the display up and down or sideways to view hidden parts.
To scroll the display in small steps you can click on the scroll arrows at the end of the scrollbar. To page
through the display in larger steps click on the scrollbar or drag the scroll box. Alternatively you can use
the navigation keys of the computer keyboard, e.g. arrow keys or [PAGE UP] and [Page DOWN] for
vertical scroll bars.
I-76 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

5.9.8 Spin boxes
Spin boxes are used in the NACOS Platinum to display and adjust
numeric values. To adjust the value you can enter the new value
directly in the text box. Alternatively, you can use the small arrow
buttons. When you click on the small arrows and hold the trackball button, then the velocity value in the
example will increase or decrease continuously until you release the button again. A single click on one
of the buttons will increase or decrease the value by one increment step.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-77

5.9.9 Keys for Numeric Values
Whenever it is possible or needed to enter a numeric value, the

appropriate keys wil be displayed in the control window. Select the
value to be changed and enter the desired value by clicking the
appropriate keys.
I-78 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

5.9.10 Zoom and Pan Control
The zoom and pan control in NACOS Platinum consists of a slider to adjust the zoom factor for, e.g., the
ECDIS chart, and the compass control with pan buttons, which you can use to move the image section
currently displayed.
Compass control
with 4 pan arrows
Zoom in
Slider to adjust zoom

factor
Zoom out
Fig. I / 31 Zoom and pan control
To zoom in in increments, click on , you will then see more details on the respective display. However,
the overall area displayed is smaller. To zoom out again, click on the . You will then see less details
but you will have a better general overview of, e.g. an electronic chart displayed.
To pan the display, use the panning arrows of the compass control. For example, if you click on then
the display moves to the right in increments to view a different image section of a chart or whatever is
displayed. The effect is like travelling with the eye over a large map.
To center the display, e.g. after panning, just click on the icon once.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-79

5.9.11 Alphanumeric and Graphical Indications
To make things stand out on mimics and on graphics presentations special kinds of indications are
provided. See figure I / 32. You will find the following four types of indicators:
- Static graphics and symbols
These are not operational. Neither manual nor automatic. They are visualized to help you getting
an idea of the real infrastructure aboard, e.g. of piping systems. The status is not shown because
the device is not connected to any sensoring or to the interface.
- Live updated graphics and values
These graphics are not operated through the NACOS Platinum user interface, but the state and value
is automatically (live) updated by the system. These graphics are indicated with a drop shadow and
colored graphics or a value / text indicating their state (usually "running" or "stopped"). The drop
shadow indicates live updating by the system. The color of the graphics is used to indicate the state
of the related machinery component. Even if it is blocked for some reason the color shall be main-
tained as long as the state is known. For Machinery components the block state is indicated by a
"B" shown next to the graphics.
- Changeable (clickable) graphics and values
These graphics can be operated using the NACOS Platinum user interface. They are clickable and
can be set or changed, and the value is automatically (live) updated via the system. These values
are indicated with a drop shadow below the colored graphic or value. The color of the graphic is
used to indicate the state of the related machinery component. For Machinery components the block
state is indicated by a "B" shown next to the graphics. When the mouse pointer is over the object
the pointer also changes to a pointing hand .
- Manually changeable graphics and values
This is an infrequent indicator. The state of a device can be set in the interface but the device is
not operated from the interface. Also the value is not live updated via the system. You have to go
to the physical device and change the state. The indication on the screen is an aid to the human
memory. However it also has the danger of indicating a different state than the device is actually
in. These indicators will be visualized with a "manual" icon. The colored graphic will display the
state.
Fig. I / 32 Visualisation types of indication
I-80 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

5.9.12 Alarm Icons
In NACOS Platinum all alarms will be indicated in the same way in all cases. The different states of an
alarm are indicated by different symbols in dedicated colors. The symbols will be used in the following
manner:
- Placed in front of the alarm line in Alarm Lists
- Placed in front of the label in the permanent area of RADAR and ECDIS
- As a separate symbol in mimic diagrams for binary alarms. (e.g. used for a level switch in a tank)
- As a symbol placed behind the Unit of an analogue value displayed on a mimic diagram. (e.g. used
for display of a temperature with a limit)
- As a symbol placed beside a function block symbol (indicating the state of machinery components,
e.g. pumps, valves, generators etc.
Fig. I / 33 Example of alarm types
For detailed information about alarms, please refer to the V - A L A R M S part of these operating instructions.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-81

5.10 Mouse Pointers and Clicks
In NACOS Platinum you will experience that the shape of the mouse or trackball pointer will change in
different situations as you move it over the screen. The basic shape is always the arrow used to open
menus and options on screen. In text fields, the pointer becomes a text edit caret ; on dividers, the
pointer turns into a double arrow indicating that you can resize something, and so on.
Precision select Text edit caret (cursor)
Cross hair Move
Arrow Resize, double arrow
Pointing hand Waiting
Table I / 6 Mouse pointers
The different shapes are explained in the following for the RADAR and ECDIS applications as well as for
the Machinery application. The possible types of clicks are explained separately. See chapter I - on page
31.
I-82 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

5.10.1 Pointers in RADAR and ECDIS
You will find the following specific types of pointers in the RADAR and ECDIS applications:
Pointer Explanation
Standard pointer when you are not pointing at an any specific object on
Arrow screen in the application area but when you point at menus, fields and
other controls in the sidebar, in dialogues, or in frames showing lists etc.
Precision select screen in the application area.
Cross hair– one target:

Cross hair When the mouse pointer is over one target, the cross hair pointer indicates
that the target can be acquired. A single left click acquires the target.
cross hair – multiple targets:
When the mouse pointer is over multiple targets, the cross hair pointer indi-
cates that the targets can be acquired. A single left click opens a menu that
displays the relevant acquisition options (for instance Acquire RADAR,
Acquire AIS, Acquire Both, Escape)
When the mouse pointer is over an acquired target a box around the target
indicates that it is already acquired and properties / data of the target can
be accessed. A single right click displays the properties in a tooltip or
popup. This popup should automatically hide after a few seconds.
When you move the pointer
Position indication over the RADAR PPI or the
ECDIS display, then the
respective position is indicated
in a text box together with
range and bearing.
When the mouse pointer is over a clickable object, the pointing hand indi-
Pointing hand cates that the object is clickable. Both left and right clicks can have an
effect.
When the mouse pointer is over a moveable object, for example a "handle"
, , of a variable range marker, the arrows indicate the direction in which the
handle of the object can be moved.
Table I / 7 RADAR and ECDIS pointers
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-83

5.10.2 Mouse Pointers for Machinery
You will find the following specific types of pointers in the Machinery application:
Pointer Explanation
Arrow screen in the application area but when you point at menus, fields and
other controls in the sidebar, in dialogues, or in frames showing lists etc.
When the mouse pointer is over a clickable object, the pointing hand indi-
Pointing hand cates that the object is clickable. Both left and right clicks can have an
effect.
Table I / 8 Machinery pointers
I-84 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

MACHINERY MCS Platinum
NACOS Platinum E-1 General Information
1 General Information
This part of the NACOS Platinum operating instructions describes the MCS Platinum, the Monitoring and
Control system, which is sometimes also referred to Automation system. The main difference to the
other NACOS Platinum applications is that the MCS Platinum is not only operated using the MFDs but also
using the operator panels, the so-called Duty Alarm Panels (DAP). The operation using the operator
panels is described in a separate chapter. See chapter 5 on page 47. The operation using the GUI of the
PC-based MFDs is also covered in a separate chapter. See chapter 6 on page 111.
1.1 Safety Precautions – MCS Platinum
In the following you will find some specific safety notes regarding the machinery application MCS Plat-
inum.
1.1.1 Work on Live Parts
HIGH VOLTAGE!
DANGER OF FATAL INJURIES! NEVER assume that a circuit is dead – Always
check it for safety’s sake! Contact with live parts can cause serious or fatal burns
and inner injuries by electrocution.
Voltage may only be applied to components being worked on when this is expressly prescribed (e.g.
during troubleshooting). Mains switches are live even when the equipment is switched off. During work
always observe the relevant regulations for the prevention of accidents, e.g. German VBG 4, or EN 292.
Only use suitable, intact tools and measuring instruments!
1.1.2 Maintenance and Repair
HIGH VOLTAGE!
Maintenance and repair may only be carried out by specifically authorised
persons.
Prior to installation and maintenance and repair work, the following

disconnecting procedures must be adhered to:
Isolate electrical supply of all relevant components:
- switch off the equipment,
- disconnect mains connection and
- take precautions to prevent inadvertent re-connection.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-3

E MACHINERY.fm / 14.12.11
E-1 General Information NACOS Platinum
If these operating instructions require you to remove safety systems for maintenance work or repair, be
sure to reinstall them after finishing work. Only remove safety devices if this is necessary for the main-
tenance work or repair. This particularly applies to covers and ground cables.
1.1.3 Electrostatic Discharge
ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES!

NACOS Platinum components contain electrostatic sensitive devices.
Observe precautions for handling.
The discharge of electrostatic energy into a semiconductor can destroy the semiconductor or change its
properties. Before a respective unit’s housing is opened to remove or touch a board, the service equip-
ment, Order No. 586-5011, must be used.
1. The mat must be positioned at the workplace.
2. The added potential equalization cable must be connected to the snap fastener and the clamp to a
suitable protective earth contact. The cable contains a 1 MΩ resistor which must not be removed.
3. The wrist band must be put on. When the spiral cable is connected to the snap fastener, the
discharge line is established.
4. Thoroughly grounded soldering, measurement and test tools must be used. If these tools are
supplied with power from the 230 VAC mains, this supply must be protected by a fault current plug,
stock No. 593-8099.
Boards and units that contain ESD-sensitive semiconductors are marked with the symbol shown above.
All assisting persons who might come into contact with the endangered boards must also use the ESD
equipment.
1.2 Getting Started
These operating instructions are intended to teach you how to use the MCS Platinum system. Please,
spend a little time to read the operating instructions, you will soon get to know the MCS Platinum system.
The best way to learn is 'by doing', but before you start the 'doing' too much, we highly recommend that
you read through the first introductory chapters to get some basic knowledge of the MCS Platinum
system. Also, we recommend that you read the General part of the NACOS Platinum operating instruc-
tions to get an impression of the overall NACOS Platinum system.
Then you may start the 'doing': Take the manual to a panel (or a MFD), and try out some of the func-
tions described in operating instructions. See chapter 5 on page 47. Some of the functions require that
something has happened. For example, you can not acknowledge an alarm, if none has occurred.
However, many functions are available for trying them out, and it is also possible, e.g. to simulate alarms
or events. See chapter 5.10 on page 61.
Except from disturbing your colleges, you can cause no harm in any way by your 'doing', as long as you
do not attempt to make changes which require entering a password or which result in changed param-
eters and values.
E-4 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

Be careful whenever a password is required. Do not enter a password and

change, e.g. parameters or simulate a value, without being sure about the effects
that this will have.
1.3 Definitions and Terms MCS Platinum
Accommodation Alarm System

An Accommodation Alarm System comprises the equipment and facilities which are installed to ensure
that the alarms are relayed to the crew's accommodation so that the personnel is alerted if a fault occurs.
Alarm Announcement
An alarm is announced by acoustic and visual methods. The acoustic signal alerts the crew and the visual
signal identifies and describes the alarm. See chapter 3.9 on page 31.
Alarm Detection
Alarm detection means specific numerical and logical processing of scanned and filtered sensor values.
For example, a sensor value is compared to alarm limit values and if the limit is exceeded, this will cause
an alarm status.
Alarm/Event Trigger Function

A piece of software used by a monitoring channel to process an input value and to release an alarm
(priority 1-3) or event (priority 4) accordingly. For example, an alarm/event trigger function could check
whether a temperature value is within the defined limits. If this is not the case, an alarm is triggered.
Alarm Group
An alarm group is a logical group of related alarm channels. A single alarm channel can be included in
more than one alarm group.
Alarm List
The Alarm List is a list containing all present and/or unacknowledged alarms.
Alarm Panel
See D u t y A l a r m P a n e l – D A P below.
Alarm Systems
The MCS Platinum can be configured in a manner that alarms of one of the monitored sections of the
ship are indicated only at specific alarm panels (DAP) and alarm displays in order to draw the operator’s
attention. These alarm panels and alarm displays constitute one alarm system. The machinery alarm
system can have some additional facilities compared to the other alarm systems. See also buzzer alarm
priorities. See chapter 4.6 on page 45.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-5

All Operators Call, All Engineers Call, All Navigators Call

An alarm situation which causes alarms in all engineers’, navigators’, and operators’ cabins, as well as in
all public rooms. An All Operators Call is triggered if, e.g., an alarm has been unacknowledged for
more than e.g. 5 minutes. All Operators Call is therefore often also called "5 min. alarm".
Assist Call
The Assist Call is a communication feature in the NACOS Platinum. Using the Assist Call function, an
operator can call a crew member or a group of crew memebers for help. The respective person will be
informed via specific panels that help is required at a specific location on board.
See chapter 5.13 on page 82.
Backup Navigator Call

When the ship is sailing with one navigator on the bridge only, another person qualified to maintain a
bridge watch shall be appointed as backup navigator. A backup navigator call is output in form of an
alarm using the A c c o m m o d a t i o n A l a r m S y s t e m to alert the backup navigator in case alarms on the bridge
are not acknowledged within a specific time.
See also: N a v i g a t o r F i t n e s s C h e c k .
Configuration Database
A database which contains system information, e.g. all alarm channel information. It is filled during the
customisation, and is used to load system-specific data to the system. See chapter 2.5 on page 14. More
information is alo provided in the Technical Manual ED3200G100 MatNo 390008522.
Customisation
In these operating instructions, customisation refers to the process of commissioning and initial setup of
the MCS Platinum according to your requirements. This is implemented before the system is handed over
to you. See chapter 2.5 on page 14.
Cut-Out
Under certain conditions, e.g. when the respective physical device is stopped/not running, a signal will
violate the preset limit for generating an alarm, but the respective alarm is unwanted in the described
situation. To prevent the alarm system from generating an alarm, the alarm channel is suppressed, i.e.
"cut-out". The respective setting can be automatic or a manual setting. See chapter 3.7.1 on page 29.
Data Acquisition
In the context of the MCS Platinum, data acquisition means scanning the analog and binary input chan-
nels, initial filtering, pre-evaluation incl. limit and range check, wiring monitoring and conversion from
analog to digital representation.
Deadman Alarm
The Deadman Alarm is a safety feature ensuring that systems are properly attended to. If the function
is activated for a specific system or section, the operator must press a key at regular intervals which
indicates that the respective system is attended to. If the operator fails to press the key, an alarm is
triggered.
E-6 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

Duty Alarm Panel – DAP

Duty Alarm Panel (DAP) is a general, higher-order term which stands for the Duty Alarm Panel Bridge,
Duty Alarm Panel ECR, and Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation. A DAP provides the minimum display and
operating options which are required to operate the MCS Platinum.
Duty Engineer Call and Duty Officer Call

In order to be able to sail with Unattended Machinery Area (sometimes also named unmanned machinery
area), the alarm system must provide features for a duty engineer call in form of an alarm in the accom-
modation areas if an alarm occurs. On the bridge, the MCS Platinum also features the respective duty
officer call.
See chapter 5.12 on page 74. See also A c c o m m o d a t i o n A l a r m S y s t e m above.
Engineer Fitness Check

This alarm function is used when a crew member is alone in the engine rooms. In order to verify the
engineers’ fitness, a system based on interval checking can be arranged. See chapter 3.12 on page 37.
Filtering
A technical means to suppress noise and other fluctuations in sensor values and alarm detection. Two
commonly applied methods are low pass filtering and delay of alarm detection. It should be noted that,
besides electrical and electromagnetic noise, the physical environment will impose noise on the sensor
values. The physical environment can introduce considerable noise at the following frequencies: Level
sensors are influenced by the ship’s roll which lies in the frequency range 0.1-0.3 Hz, the diesel engine
has an ignition frequency at approximately 1.5-30 Hz, and the main machinery components, such as the
auxiliary diesels, compressors, pumps etc. induce noise in a frequency range from approximately 4 Hz
and above.
Local Operator Panel (LOP)

A LOP is a special panel type used to operate the MCS Platinum. It is located directly on a Field
Processing Device. It provides similar functions as the DAP but has an extended functional scope.
Monitoring Channel
A monitoring channel is a piece of software which serves to read input data. The channel also processes
the data according to defined rules resulting in an event, an alarm, or data displayed.
Navigator Fitness Check

A navigator fitness check system is used when the ship is sailing with one navigator on the bridge only.
In order to ensure that the bridge is properly manned, a system is arranged to verify operator fitness.
The system can monitor if, e.g., MCS Platinum alarms, ARPA alarms (Automatic RADAR Plotting Aid),
echo sounder alarms or ship handling station alarms are acknowledged within a certain time. Further to
the monitoring of the navigation alarms, the system at fixed intervals verifies the fitness of the navigator
also. In case of unacknowledged alarms a Backup Navigator Call is triggered.
See also D e a d m a n A l a r m above.
Notification System
A notification system, sometimes also called warning system, is used to draw the engineers' attention to
the engine control room when they are working in the engine rooms. Situations where the engineers'
attention is required could be, e.g., telephone calls, telegraph movements or alarms.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-7

Field Processing Device (FPD)

Cabinets, which can be placed at any location in the system environment on the ship, and which can be
interconnected by different communication networks. A FPD contains the computers used in the
MCS Platinum System.
Thermonitor
The Thermonitor is an alarm and monitoring function for supervision of, e.g., the main bearing temper-
atures or the exhaust gas temperatures of the main and auxiliary engines. The Thermonitor function
includes measurement of the actual cylinder temperatures, calculation of the average temperature, and
calculation of the difference between the actual cylinder temperature and the average. All measurements
and calculated values include high and low alarm limits.
Unattended Watch Station

This is a mode of the alarm system which is selected during periods of unattended machinery area while
sailing at sea. During Unattended Watch Station, the alarms are routed to the bridge to warn the navi-
gator, who will make sure that someone takes care of the alarm.
Watch Station
The Watch Station is the location having the watch responsibility. At the Watch Station, the alarms are
announced and must be acknowledged. Each alarm system (see A l a r m S y s t e m s ) can have its own Watch
Station, and can have the possibility of moving the Watch Station between different locations. See
chapter 5.11 on page 71.
E-8 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

NACOS Platinum E-2 System Description
2 System Description
The MCS Platinum is part of the overall NACOS Platinum system, see General part of these operating
instructions. The MCS Platinum is the central system for monitoring important sub-systems, equipment,
and locations on a ship, for example the ship’s engine operation, the bridge, the cargo on tankers, or
the reefer area.
To officers/engineers in locations like

- Bridge
- Cabins
- Public rooms
- Cargo control room
- Engine control room
Alarms and
- etc.
other information
Monitoring System MCS Platiunum
Electronic signals from
Main Auxiliary HFO MDO Cooling

etc. Cargo Reefer Bridge
engine engines system system system
Fig. E / 1 The MCS Platinum in its overall system environment
The MCS Platinum collects data from the monitored system and provides the following monitoring func-
tions:
- It reports critical operating states of the monitored systems by means of alarms and provides
detailed information about the alarms.
- It distributes the alarm announcements to the relevant locations (ECR, bridge, cabins, public rooms,
etc.), in order to allow the duty engineer or officer, the back-up engineer, or any other crew
member to respond to the alarms. See chapter 5.12 on page 74.
- It may also include a deadman function which ensures that a missing reaction by a duty will be
observed immediately.
The MCS Platinum can log alarms and the MCS Platinum operating status in form of events. In addition,
MCS Platinum can carry out minor control tasks for the connected systems, i.e. adjusting parameters like
limit values or alarm delays.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-9

E-2 System Description NACOS Platinum
2.1 MCS Platinum Main Components and System Architecture
The following figure shows an example of a common MCS Platinum system architecture:
Duty Alarm MFD MFD MFD MFD

System 26" TFT 26" TFT 26" TFT 22" TFT
BRIDGE
DAP Manoeuvre Journal Alarm/Event CHIEF /

Printer Printer Printer OFFICE
NAVIGATION
NETWORK
DAP
ACCOM.
AAP
MFD MFD MFD

24" TFT 24" TFT 24" TFT
DAP Alarm/Event Journal Alarm/Event

ECR
Printer Printer Printer
ETHERNET RING
REDUNDANT PANEL NET

MACHINERY SPACE
Serial Interfaces: MCS MCS MCS MCS MCS MCS MCS MCS MCS MCS
1x Voyage Data Recorder
1x Load Calculator
2x Power Management System
1x Tank Level Gauging System LOP LOP LOP LOP LOP LOP LOP LOP LOP LOP
1x Torque Meter System
1x Fire Alarm System FPD 1 FPD 2 FPD 3 FPD 4 FPD 5 FPD 6 FPD 7 FPD 8 FPD 9 FPD 10
1x Propulsion Control System
1x Engine Safety System I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O
1x Maintenance System
Field Processing Devices
Fig. E / 2 MCS Platinum system architecture
The system architecture of the MCS Platinum consists of a variety of hardware components:
- FPD with optional Local Operator Panel (LOP)
- Duty Alarm Panel (DAP Bridge / ECR / Accommodation)
- MFDs (Multi Functions Displays)
- Alarm / log printer
- Ethernet communication
- Redundant panel net
The FPD handles the functions of the alarm detection. It can be equipped with a Local Operator Panel
(LOP) which directly provides the operator with alarm information on the front of the FPD. Duty Alarm
Panels (DAP) are normally (see 2.5 on page E 14) installed on the bridge, in the engine control room,
and in the accommodation area.
E-10 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

The DAP Bridge or ECR provides the operator with the complete functionality required for using the alarm
system. This includes acknowledging alarms, selecting a duty officer or engineer, controlling printer(s),
etc. Duty Alarm Panels Accommodation are installed in the cabins of the duty officers/engineers and in
public rooms. They are used for alarm output and duty calls to crew members in the accommodation
areas.
The MFDs are used together with the DAPs. They extend the amount of information to be displayed
simultaneously and show details in graphical form. The printers are used for printing the different logs
and reports.
The Ethernet interconnects the FPDs and is mainly used for interchange of information between the FPDs
and the MFDs including control. The panel net connects the FPDs and the Duty Alarm Panels:
- The second panel net is used for communication between one FPD and the DAPs.
- The third panel net is used for communication to the Local Operator Panel, if included in the FPD.
- The Ethernet is for communication between the FPD(s) and the MFD(s).
2.2 MCS Platinum as Stand-Alone Alarm System
As shown in the following application example, the MCS Platinum can be set up in form of a simple stand-
alone system which at least requires one FPD, the Master FPD. Any additional FPDs would be connected
as slave FPDs.
MCS
Alarm/Event LOP
Printer
FPD 1
I/O
Field Processing Device
Fig. E / 3 Stand-Alone alarm system
In the figure, an alarm system is outlined that can supervise a number of sensors. It outputs audible and
visual alarms on the LOP, including information on the sensor that caused the alarm. Also, the values of
the supervised parameters are displayed. If a printer is connected, then the details of alarms can also
be printed.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-11

2.3 Basic Alarm System - Duty Alarm System
This section describes an application example of the MCS Platinum in form of a basic duty alarm config-
uration that meets the requirements of unattended machinery area. The system shown in Figure E / 4
has the same basic functionality as the stand-alone system described above. However, this system
includes additional Duty Alarm Panels that allow remote alarm annunciation on the bridge, in the engi-
neers’ cabins and in the public rooms. A printer is connected to the system, which serves to log all alarms
and events.
As this example is designed for unattended machinery area, an alarm will cause audible alarm in the
cabin of the engineer, who is selected as being on duty, as well as in the public rooms enabling the
engineer on duty to move freely between any of these locations, and still be sure to receive the alarm.
To acknowledge an alarm, the engineer must go to the Engine Control Room.
Duty Alarm
System
DAP
BRIDGE
1 pce.
DAP
ACCOM.
DAP
ECR
1 pce.
REDUNDANT PANEL NET
MCS
Alarm/Event LOP
Printer
FPD 1
I/O
Fig. E / 4 Basic alarm system for unattended machinery area
E-12 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

2.4 Extended Alarm System for Unattended Machinery Area
In a more complex configuration that meets the requirements of unattended machinery area, also PC-
based MFDs can be used. The system of Figure E / 5 provides the same basic functionality as the one
described in the previous section. However, this system contains a MFD, a PC-based station which is able
to present more information, providing the operator with an extended graphical overview and more
details.
Duty Alarm
System
DAP
BRIDGE
1 pce.
DAP
SOD Workstation
24" TFT
ACCOM.
ETHERNET RING
DAP
ECR
1 pce.
REDUNDANT PANEL NET
MCS
Alarm/Event LOP
Printer
FPD 1
I/O
Fig. E / 5 Extended alarm system for unattended machinery area
The MCS Platinum is not limited to the configurations shown in the example. Other solutions can be
customised to meet the special requirements of specific projects. See also section 2.5 on page E 14. The
number of panels and units may vary. Also, most options are omitted in the examples, e.g., an extra
DAP in the chief engineer’s cabin.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-13

2.5 Customisation
These operating instructions are meant to be generic, i.e. generally applicable to the monitoring and
control system of type MCS Platinum, and it describes a common installation and setup which will some-
times be referred to as "standard" or "normal". Thus, some functions or features described may not be
used in your specific installation. This depends on the customisation of your system.
Your MCS Platinum has been customised by SAM Electronics according to the ship-specific requirements
which were specified when the system was ordered. In this context, customising means installing the
required hardware and setting up the configuration of the hardware according to the ship-specific
requirements. For example, a total number of 25 DAP operator panels can be connected to the system
which can be individually configured. Also, Standard Function blocks are set up according to the require-
ments. See chapter 3.15 on page 39. This is done using special system tools which are used by
SAM Electronics engineers and technicians only, and documented in the delivery documents.
Hence, in these operating instructions, the words "customisation" and "configuration" refer to the
customisation provided by SAM Electronics, unless specific MCS Platinum functions such as, e.g., the
printer configuration are dealt with.
In the course of the customisation, e.g. the configuration database is filled with configuration data. Also,
SAM Electronics will set up automatic cut-outs, the assignment of LEDs to alarm groups, information of
a Backup if the Duty does not respond to an alarm, acknowledging of alarms from ECR or CCR, activation
of horns and external signals in case of alarms, forwarding and escalation of alarms which are not
responded to, allocation of persons/roles to specific alarm systems, as well as the "Select as Watch
Station" option for DAPs. Some of the common alternatives are mentioned in the operating instructions.
However, it was not possible to cover all possible options and combinations.
For exact and specific features and functional scope of your particular installation, please refer to the
relevant order and delivery documents. For more infomation on customisation, refer to the General Part
of the NACOS Platinum operating instructions.
E-14 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

NACOS Platinum E-3 Functional Description of the System
3 Functional Description of the System
This chapter describes the main functionality and important aspects of the MCS Platinum alarm system.
If you are not already familiar with this system you should read this chapter once in order to become
familiar with the functions and features as well as the special expressions and terms which you will
encounter later in the operating instructions starting from chapter 5.
☞ NOTE:
It might be that functions and features are covered which are not available in your specific instal-
lation. See chapter 2.5 on page 14.
First, the basic concepts of alarm channels and alarms will be introduced. In the later sections of this
chapter you will find information on special functional features such as Assist Call, Deadman Alarm, and
printing functions.
3.1 General Introduction to the MCS Platinum System
The purpose of an alarm and monitoring system is to collect the information concerning the safety on
board the ship and to monitor the alarm situations. After detecting an alarm situation, the system must
announce this to the duty personnel, i.e. the following main tasks must be carried out:
1. Acquisition of monitoring data , i.e. sensor values
2. Detection of alarm status, i. e illegal states, values out of range, sensor defects, etc.
3. Announcement of detected alarms
4. Monitoring of engineer response
5. Logging of alarms and events
The alarm system gathers raw data via its hardware input channels which are connected to the various
sensor types. The data collected is passed to the monitoring software channels which interpret the data,
apply alarm/event trigger functions, and convert the data into information in order to provide the respec-
tive output, alarm messages and event messages. The differentiation between hardware and software
channels is further explained in the following sections.
3.2 Channels
Monitoring channels are the most important (virtual) structural element of the MCS Platinum. Monitoring
channels are used to implement most system functions. Small MCS Platinum systems include several
hundred, bigger systems several thousand monitoring channels. Usually, the main task of a monitoring
channel is to monitor a value and, if applicable, generate an event and/or an alarm.
However, the MCS Platinum features a variety of different channel types, and it also includes hardware
channels. It is essential to understand the basics of these in order to understand the system. As a first
step, it is very important to differentiate hardware channels and software channels (monitoring channels,
see below).
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-15

E-3 Functional Description of the System NACOS Platinum
3.2.1 Hardware Channels vs. Monitoring Channels
The hardware channels are the actual physical input channels and output channels of the FPD to which
the external sensors are connected, for example contacts and transducers. These channels are referred
to as either input channel, output channel or I/O channel, and it is important not to confuse them with
input signals and output signals as these terms always refer to monitoring (software) channels.
Other than a hardware channel, a monitoring channel (internal software channel) is a piece of software
which is able to:
- read a hardware input
- translate the input value/state into understandable information
- compare the value/state to preset alarm limits/status
- announce an alarm
So in general, when these operating instructions refer to channels of various types, it refers to the moni-
toring channel (i.e. software channel) and not to an input channel which would mean an actual physical
channel, see also section 3.2 on page E 15.
When the MCS Platinum detects an alarm, then the alarm is announced via a monitoring channel both
by an audible buzzer or horn signal and a visual signal, including Alarm LED and the various types of
text displays. In response to the alarm announcement the engineer must stop the buzzer or horn and
acknowledge the alarm to confirm that he is aware of what has happened. If the engineer does not
respond to the alarm announcement within a configurable time, the MCS Platinum will output an All
Operators Call, i.e. announce the alarm in all engineers’, navigators’, and operators’ cabins, as well as in
all public rooms to make sure that the alarm is noticed.
The monitoring channels (software channels) are created in the MCS Platinum customising tool. The defi-
nition of features and functions of monitoring channel is developed in the project and customisation
phase. See chapter 2.5 on page 14. In that phase, it is, e.g. predefined whether a channel is an alarm
or event channel, a binary or analog channel and so on. However, in system operation, it is still possible
to change some of the monitoring channel parameters like limit values and alarm delays. See chapter
5.10 on page 61. There are various types of monitoring channels, which are described in section 3.3 on
page E 18.
3.2.2 Input / Output Channels of Field Processing Devices (Hardware I/O)
The hardware input channels of the FPDs are customised to make the sensor values available as input
to the monitoring channels by defining:
- Physical channel address
- Sensor type
- Range and engineering unit
These definitions are all made in the setup of the I/O-channel which is defining the hardware input/
output to which the sensor is connected. The MCS Platinum is capable of directing the status of the moni-
toring channels to physical output channels also. The following status values of a monitoring channel can
be directed to the output channels of the alarm and control computers. The list is only an example and
some channel types may differ:
- Monitored status of binary channels
- Alarm status of alarm channels
- Unacknowledged status of alarm channels
E-16 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

- High alarm status of analog channels

- Low alarm status of analog channels
- Automatic Cut-Out status
- Manual Cut-Out status
- Simulation status of alarm channels
- Signal validity failure (sensor failure)
- Event status
- Internal system alarms and failures
Also, the status of the alarm groups can be directed to the output channels:
- Alarm in group (including sensor failure)
- Unacknowledged alarm in group
3.2.3 Inputs and Outputs of Monitoring Channels
Each monitoring channel has at least one signal input (the main signal input) and exactly one signal
output. Usually, the value present at the main signal input arrives as an unaltered output value at the
signal output. If a monitoring channel has further signal inputs in addition to the main signal input, the
output value is generated by offset or logical operation of the present values.
In most cases, the output value is monitored by an alarm/event trigger function of the monitoring
channel, i.e. when all conditions are met, then the monitoring channel generates an event and,
depending on configuration, an alarm for logging purposes.
Inputs to Monitoring Channels

The input signals to the monitoring channels are either binary (on/off signals) or analog signals. These
input signals can be taken from the hardware I/O channels, from other monitoring channels, from the
system variables, etc. Several of the monitoring channel types can accept more than one input. Input
signals to monitoring channels can be:
- Hardware input channels on the field processing devices (FPD) which are connected to the external
sensors and transducers which are used for measuring values or obtaining status information of the
machinery or other external equipment
- Internal signals from other SAM Electronics equipment which are received via a bus system
Internal signals can be used by more than one monitoring channel. This means that, e.g., two alarm
limits, "high" and "high-high", can be implemented by using the same signal as input signal to two
monitoring channels.
- Output signals from other monitoring channels, e.g. the average value from an average channel
Such output signals can be used by more than one monitoring channel. This means that, e.g., two
alarm limits, "high" and "high-high", can be implemented by using the same signal as input signal
to two monitoring channels.
- Constants, i.e. a constant value entered when defining the channel.
- System values, e.g. individual hardware errors.
Output from SFB in case of an error.
Output from software application in case of an error, e.g. TP error.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-17

The input signals are checked for validity if the signal types allow to do so. In case of an input signal
failure, e.g. a broken cable, the monitoring channel enters a "signal validity failure" status. This causes
an alarm and all other results of the monitoring channel are suppressed. The only exception is when a
simulation for the monitoring channel is present as this will suppress the signal validity failure alarm.
Output from Monitoring Channels

If the channel is configured as alarm channel, then the output of the channel can be, depending on the
system’s conditions, an alarm, see section 3.6 on page E 27. The value or status of a monitoring channel
can be also used for further processing, e.g. as input to another monitoring channel. It can also be
routed to a hardware output channel for external communication, e.g., to activate an output causing a
main engine slow-down or RA-Alarm (Radar Alarm Output).
3.3 Monitoring Channel Types
For the different tasks, which are processed with the aid of the monitoring channels, a wide range of
channel types is provided. The types vary regarding type and quantity of inputs and outputs and
regarding the transfer functions.
The monitoring channels are used either for detection of alarms or for detection of events, depending
on the alarm/event trigger function used. As a consequence of this, the monitoring channels are divided
into two groups, the main types:
- Alarm channels
- Event channels
The difference between alarm and event channels is the priority. Event channels always have priority 4,
alarm channels can have priority 1-3, see section 3.6.2 on page E 28. The monitoring channels have
different types of input signals and/or different functional requirements, and therefore, the two main
types are divided again into a number of specific monitoring channel types.
Alarm channel types:
- Binary alarm channel
- Analog alarm/indication channel
Event channel types:
- Binary event channel
- Analog event channel
- Analog event channel with hysteresis
- Average channel
The channel types are further described in the following subsections.
☞ NOTE:
Please note that not necessarily all of the channel types are being used in your installation.
E-18 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

3.3.1 Alarm Channels
The alarm channels monitor signals and check whether signals have Normal status or Alarm status. Once
a signal has entered the alarm status, all information about the alarm is registered in the alarm channel.
The information are stored by the alarm channel until the operator has seen and acknowledged the
alarm. This is independent of whether the signal remains in alarm status or returns to Normal before the
acknowledgement. Thus, an alarm channel can have the status values described in section 3.6.1 on page
E 27. Alarm channels can be either analog or binary.
Binary Alarm Channels

The binary alarm channels are used to monitor switches or other binary signals, and a binary alarm
channel can be selected to give an alarm when the switch is open or when it is closed. A binary alarm
channel enters the alarm status when the monitored alarm signal, e.g. a switch, has been on for more
than a predefined delay time. The channel leaves the alarm status when the monitored signal has been
off for more than another predefined delay time (On/Off delay).
Analog Alarm Channels

The analog alarm channels are used for supervision of analog inputs, and all signals are checked for
validity. The analog inputs can be received from the transducers sending voltage or current signals, or
from sensors such as PT100, NiCrNi, potentiometers, etc.
An alarm is triggered when the monitored value exceeds the preset high limit, or drops below the preset
low limit for more than a predefined delay time. It returns to Normal status when the monitored value
has been within the limits for more than another predefined delay time.
3.3.2 Event Channels
Event channels are used for logging of events or status information, e.g. information on whether an
engine is stopped or running, and they can be used as Cut-Out inputs for the alarm channels. The events
can be logged in the alarm print logs and the event logs by using two customised texts which identify
the respective status. For example: purifier "Running" or "Stopped".
Binary event channels can detect one of two status values, e.g. running or stopped, which are
controlled by a switch or by a different binary input signal.
Analog event channels detects one of two status values of a component by monitoring if an analog
signal is above or below a preset limit. Example: an engine can be considered running or stopped
depending on whether the speed is above or below a preset operating speed.
Analog event channels with hysteresis detects if the value of an analog signal changes by more
than a preset hysteresis. This enables the channel to be printed each time the hysteresis is exceeded.
3.3.3 Binary Monitoring Channels
The binary channels can use one or two input signals. If two input signals are used, the monitored status
can be defined by a number of different logic conditions of the input signals. The logic condition to be
used is selected when defining the channel. See chapter 2.5 on page 14. The output value of the channel
can also be simulated by manual input. See chapter 3.7 on page 29.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-19

In the following, the inputs are named A and B and "high" is equal to alarm or event status "on". The
following options are provided:
in out
in out
A output = input NOT output equals

A
inverted input
in out in out
A A
AND XOR
B B
in out in out
A A
OR XNOR
B B
Fig. E / 6 Logic conditions for binary channels
The conditions illustrated in Figure E / 6 have the following meanings:

- Single input, default type: high if A high
The output value is identical with the input value.
- NOT (inverter), single input: output high if A low
- AND gate: high if A and B in high status
- OR gate: high if A or B in high status
- XOR gate: high if A is different from B
- XNOR gate: high if A equals B
Application examples of logic used in the alarm channels:
- AND gate: an alarm is triggered if a pressure is low and a pump is not started.
- XOR gate: an alarm is triggered with an appropriate time delay if, e.g., a valve with switch feedback
does not have a position equal to the command.
- XNOR gate: together with an appropriate time delay, the double indicating signals such as, e.g.,
main-breaker closed / main-breaker open, can be monitored for inconsistency.
In the following, specific types of binary channels are outlined.
COUNTER
This type is a cumulative counter for the alternating cycles of the present binary signal, and it provides
this total as (analog) output value. By configuration it is set as event counter or as stroke counter. In
case of the event counter the input signal is a status signal. The counter counts the number of times
E-20 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

the input signal has the status ON. The sampling rate is 640 msec. Thus, only status changes are
correctly counted the interval of which is greater than 640 msec. Application example: how many times
does the pump start during the travel of the ship.
In case of the stroke counter input pulses are present at the signal input. The counter counts the pulses
in a cumulative manner. The max. output value is 99,999,999. The stroke counter can be configured in
a way that its output value is changed for each, every ten, or every hundred pulses so that it can count
up to 9,999,999,900 pulses. Application example: counting the revolutions of an engine.
The output value can be set to an initial value by the operator by changing the respective channel param-
eter (PRESET VALUE), e.g. using a DAP. See chapter 5.10 on page 61.
FLOW COUNTER
The Flow Counter counts pulses supplied and provides the pulse rate as output value. Examples:
- A flow meter gives 10 pulses per litre. The output value is the flow rate, the unit is, e.g. litres/hour.
- A speed log gives 200 pulses per nautical mile. The output value is the ship’s velocity,
the unit is, e.g., kn.
- A main engine gives 10 pulses per revolution. The output value is the ME RPM.
The output value is smoothed by determining the average with the aid of a sampling time. The sampling
time is the time, during which 200 pulses have been received, however, a minimum of 30 sec. and a
maximum of 600 sec.
HOUR COUNTER
This channel type serves to measure for how long the status signal at the main input is ON. It provides
the time measured as (analog) output value. By configuration it is defined whether fractional digits are
output. The max. output value is 99,999,999 or 9,999,999.9 hours.
PULSE ALARM
This channel type is used to monitor whether pulses are present. The alarm/event trigger function of the
channel outputs an alarm/event, if within a defined time (Delay On) there is no change in input signal.
SUM COUNTER
The Sum counter has a binary input and an anlog output value. This type is used to calculate a quantity,
which is counted by pulses, by multiplying the number of present pulses at its signal input by a config-
ured factor. Examples:
- A flow meter gives 10 pulses per litre. The output value is the flow volume, the unit is, e.g. litre.
- A speed log gives 200 pulses per nautical mile. The output value is the mileage, the unit is NM.
- A main engine gives 10 pulses per revolution. The output value is the total number of revolutions.
BIN EXT SERIAL

This type is used, if a connected system monitors its own status signal, but if the alarm output (and/or
logging) shall be provided via the MCS Platinum. The analog signal and the trigger signal are both trans-
ferred to the MCS Platinum via a common serial input interface.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-21

ENUMERATED
This type is only used for internal purposes in the MCS Platinum.
3.3.4 Analog Channels
The analog monitoring channels (except the average channel) have 3 analog input signals, and the moni-
tored value is the result of the 3 inputs using the formula: monitored value = A + B - C. The inputs B
and C are automatically set to 0 if they are not used.
in out
Main A
Add B
Subtract C
Fig. E / 7 Logic conditions for analog channels
The output value of the channel can also be simulated by manual input, see 3.7 on page E 29.
Application examples for analog channels:
- Compensation of the relative measuring sensors by adding an absolute offset to give absolute
values, e.g. cold junction compensation of NiCr/Ni sensors. As described under 3.2.3 on page E 17,
also a constant can be an input to a monitoring channel. Alternatively, the compensation can be
done by using a PT100 sensor located at the cold junction point. In this case, the measured value
of the NiCr/Ni sensor is compensated by the actual ambient temperature.
- Relative measuring, e.g. deviation values for measurement of the exhaust gas temperatures are
made by subtracting the average value from the actual cylinder temperature.
- Offset of a measuring value, e.g. the "equalize" function of the thermonitor is made by adding a
constant to the measuring value.
- Supervision of control functions, e.g., that a temperature controller or a position controller, e.g. for
propeller pitch or a valve functions properly. This is done by subtracting the setpoint from the actual
value and setting a proper time delay.
The interpretation of the monitored status depends on whether the channel is an alarm channel or an
event channel.
In the following, specific types of binary channels are outlined.
AVERAGE
This channel type can be used to monitor the average value of up to 16 input signals. The average value
is calculated as the arithmetic mean, i.e. the sum of the signal values is divided by the number of signals.
Each of the input signals can be omitted in the average calculation dynamically, e.g. due to an alarm
situation indicating that an input signal is invalid for the average calculation. In case of a sensor failure,
the respective input channel is automatically excluded from the average calculation. Average channels
have upper and lower alarm limits. Alarm detection functions in the same way as for analog alarm chan-
nels.
E-22 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

Application Example – Thermonitor

The supervision system for the cylinder exhaust gas temperature or the main bearing temperature moni-
toring with supervision of high temperature deviation of each cylinder compared to the average values
is often called a "thermonitor" function.
For implementing a thermonitor, an average channel is used together with two sets of analog alarm
channels, one set monitoring the actual sensor signals from which the average value is calculated, and
one set monitoring the deviations between the average value and each of the sensor signals.
IN RANGE
This type is used to monitor whether an analog value, if appl. after addition or/and subtraction of other
input values, is within a defined range (limit values). A typical application is the alarm output regarding
critical speed.
Regarding the representation of the channel parameters it must be pointed out that the two limit values,
which serve to define the value range, are both assigned to one alarm/event trigger function.
OUT OF RANGE
This type corresponds to the type IN RANGE. The only difference is that there is an alarm output, if the
monitored value is outside the value range defined by the limit values.
ANALOG LOG
This type is used to determine the change of an analog signal, if appl. after addition or/and subtraction
of the other input values, in order to enable logging, see page 65. The trigger type is Hysteresis. The
principle of that trigger type is, e.g., applied in a refrigerator thermostat. For example, if the temperature
exceeds an upper limit of 4°C, the compressor is started. However, the compressor will not stop as soon
as the temperature falls below 4°C but it will run until 2°C are reached. This prevents excessive switching
action of the compressor as the temperature drifts around the set value. In the same way, analog signals
are logged when passing a limit but not instantly logged again when the limit is passed again.
For the output value, this trigger type has a sample + hold function: the output value remains constant,
until the change of the input value has reached the limit value. Then the output value is instantly set to
the value of the input value.
Moreover, a time (Delay On) can be defined, which must elapse after an event, until the next event may
be output. This way, in case of rapid changes of the input value, the frequency of the events and thus
the logging frequency can be limited.
ANALOG DISPLAY
This type is used, if an analog signal, if appl. after addition or/and subtraction of the other input values,
shall be displayed and/or further processed, but if no logging or alarm output is required.
SUM INTEGRATOR
The Sum Integrator has an analogue input value and an analogue output value. This type serves to
determine the total quantity (if appl. after addition or/and subtraction of the other input values) based
on its input signal, which corresponds to a quantity per time unit (rate, flow). Examples:
The input value corresponds to a flow rate of 154 l/min. The output value is the flow volume, the unit
is, e.g. litre.
The input value corresponds to a velocity of 21 kn. The output value is the mileage, the unit is NM.
The input value corresponds to a speed of 103 rev/min. The output value is the total number of revolu-
tions.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-23

The output value can be set to an initial value by the operator by changing the respective channel
parameter (PRESET VALUE), e.g. using a DAP. See chapter 5.10 on page 61.
ANA EXT SERIAL

This type is used, if a connected system independently monitors its own analog signal, but if the alarm
output (and/or logging) shall be provided by the MCS Platinum. In that case, the analog signal and the
signal releasing the alarm/event are transferred to the MCS Platinum via a common serial input interface.
This type differs from type BIN EXT SERIAL only in one respect: at the main input no status signal but
an analog signal is present.
3.4 Channel Identification
A channel is identified by IDs and a more descriptive channel text.
3.4.1 Channel ID and Yard ID
All channels are identified by two IDs: the channel ID and the Yard ID which is defined by the shipyard.
The channel ID consist of 8 alphanumeric characters, i.e. it can be a combination of letters and digits
but it must not contain spaces. The Yard ID is a 20 character designation.
In these operating instructions, the notation <chn id> specifies a channel number displayed in the above
format, i.e. channel ID. For displays, where only one of the two IDs is displayed, the channel ID is the
default.
3.4.2 Channel Text (<channel name>)
The channel text is used for identification of a channel by a short description text. The channel name is
an ASCII text string with a max. length of 30 characters.
Format: <xxxx....>
In these operating instructions, the notation <channel name> specifies a channel name which is
displayed in the above format.
3.4.3 Channel Parameters
The channel parameters are the details of a monitoring channel, e.g. the type of channel, the name, limit
values, actual value, as well as cut-out and simulation status. Some of the channel parameters can be
changed if required. See chapter 5.10 on page 61.
E-24 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

3.5 Integrated Alarm Systems
The MCS Platinum is able to handle up to four alarm systems. The only relation between the alarm
systems is that they share the FDPs as well as the panels. A typical configuration with four alarm systems
is:
- Machinery alarm system
- Bridge alarm system
- Cargo alarm system
- Reefer alarm system
The differentiation of alarm systems provides that, e.g., cargo alarms or reefer alarms can be acknowl-
edged from a Duty Alarm Panel CCR, located in the Cargo Control Room, and that these alarms can be
routed to a separate duty person when the CCR is unattended. The MCS Platinum can be customised in
a way that, if no attention is paid to a cargo or reefer alarm, an alarm is triggered in a different alarm
system after a period of time. See chapter 2.5 on page 14.
By integrating the alarm system concept into the existing hardware, information of all alarm systems can
be presented on both the panels as well as on the screens of the MFDs (PC-stations). The general func-
tions and features of the MCS Platinum are available in all integrated alarm systems.
If an alarm occurs in one of the alarm systems, it is announced independent of the other alarm systems,
unless it is an All Operators Call. The alarm announcement procedure is identical for the four alarm
systems. For the four alarm systems, the following can be selected independently:
- Duty officer/engineer
- Backup officer/engineer
- Watch Station
- Deadman system status
- Unattended WS / bridge standby
☞ NOTE:
A person may be duty or backup officer/engineer in more than one alarm system at a time and one
DAP may be WS for more than one alarm system at a time.
The four alarm systems share the alarm panels. Some of the panels output alarms of all four alarm
systems, some panels only output alarms of one specific alarm system. The following table explains the
way in which alarms are announced at the different locations and on the different panels on board.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-25

The following rules apply:
Panel Location / Mix of Alarm Systems Alarm Announcement

Panel Function
DAP selected as WS – not The DAP only includes the alarm The DAP only outputs alarms of
located on the bridge systems for which the DAP is the alarm systems for which the
selected as WS. DAP is selected as WS.
DAP on the bridge The following alarm systems are Alarms from the following alarm
included: systems are output:
bridge alarm system Alarms from the bridge alarm
All alarm systems which are system defined. See chapter 2.5
selected as Unattended WS (bridge on page 14.
standby) Alarms from other alarm systems
Alarm systems for which the DAP is with the attribute 'always
selected as WS. announced on the bridge'
All alarm systems which are
selected as Unattended WS (also
called bridge standby)
Alarm systems for which the DAP
is selected as WS
DAP in public rooms All alarm systems are included. Alarms are output for all systems
having a selected duty officer/
engineer. See chapter 5.12 on
page 74.
DAP in cabins All alarm systems are included Only an All Operators Call is
(AAP, Accommodation output.
Alarm Panels)
The respective person is
neither duty nor backup
duty for any of the alarm
systems.
DAP in cabin The DAP in that cabin only includes The DAP only outputs alarms of
The respective person is alarm from the alarm systems for alarm systems for which the
selected as duty officer/ which the respective person is duty person is the person on duty.
engineer or backup duty officer/engineer or backup duty.
in one or more alarm
systems.
LOP All alarm systems are included but You can select whether the LOP
you can only acknowledge alarms will output all alarms (option
of the FPD, to which the LOP is Entire System) or only the alarms
connected. Other alarms can only of the FPD the LOP belongs to
be displayed by the LOP. (option Local PLC). See chapter
5.9 on page 58.
Table E / 1 Distribution of alarms to different panels
Example:
The 2nd officer is customised, e.g., to serve the bridge alarm system and cargo alarm system. See
chapter 2.5 on page 14. This means that he can be selected as duty and backup officer for both alarm
systems. He is selected as duty officer for the cargo alarm system and he is not selected as Backup
officer for the bridge alarm system.
An alarm in the cargo alarm system results in the following:
- The alarm is announced by the DAP in the 2nd officer’s cabin.
E-26 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

- The alarm is displayed on the LCD of that DAP.

However, an alarm in the bridge alarm system is not announced and not displayed on the DAP in the
2nd officer’s cabin.
3.6 Alarm Announcement and Acknowledgement
An alarm is announced via the buzzer and the Alarm LED on the relevant panels. In addition to the
buzzer in the panel, a number of additional alarm horns and alarm lamps can be used. These devices
are normally started simultaneously with the buzzer in the WS panel. However, the activation of external
horns and lamps can be customised according to special requirements. For example, in case of a new
alarm the rotating lights can be switched on for 30 seconds before the horns in the engine room are
switched on.
Messages describing the alarm are displayed on the LCDs of the panels as well as on the MFD screens.
When the operator responds to a new alarm, the necessary approach is normally always the same: first
the horn/buzzer is stopped and then the alarm is acknowledged at the Watch Station, which is in many
cases located in the engine control room. For descriptions of how to process alarms in different scenarios,
please refer to section 5.17 on page E 105.
The alarms are always announced in at least one location, the Watch Station, which is the centre of the
alarm system. Alarms must always be acknowledged at the Watch Station within a preset time. Other-
wise, an All Operators Call, also called "5 minutes alarm", will be output on all panels of the alarm
system. Please note that stopping the horn or buzzer has no effect on the alarm status. The alarm must
be acknowledged in order to avoid the All Operators Call. The ranking of alarms is described in section
3.6.3 below.
Except when manually cut-out (see 3.7 below), the alarm announcement can not be suppressed on the
Watch Station regardless of any MCS Platinum functional mode. Where else an alarm is announced
depends on whether or not the Watch Station is attended and/or if a duty officer/engineer has been
selected. See chapter 5.12 on page 74.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-27

3.6.1 Alarm States and Status Values
A monitoring channel can have various states. The respective status values are displayed on the panels:
Alarm State Meaning Status Value
Normal This status indicates trouble-free operation or that the monitoring NORM
channel is cut out. See chapter 5.10 on page 61. The channel is not NORM/CA
listed in any Alarm List. S NORM
The S in the status value indicates a simulation, see 3.7 on page E S NORM/CA
29.
Alarm, A present, pending alarm. ALM
unacknowledged The alarm signal is on, buzzer/horn are sounding, the Alarm LED S ALM
flashes, the alarm is displayed in the Alarm List, and the alarm has
NOT been acknowledged.
The alarm needs to be acknowledged and remedial action needs to
be taken to correct the respective fault.
The S in the status value indicates a simulation, see 3.7 on page E
29.
Alarm, A present, pending alarm as described above, the alarm is displayed ALM
acknowledged in the Alarm List. S ALM
However, the alarm has already been acknowledged, buzzer and
Alarm LED are off, but the conditions causing the alarm have not
been corrected.
Remedial action still needs to be taken to correct the respective fault.
29.
Alarm, No information available from the respective monitoring channel. The ?
Device Fail channel is included in the Device Fail list.
Alarm, Due to sensor failure, no information available from the respective FAIL
Sensor Fail monitoring channel. The channel is included in the Sensor Fail list.
Normal, The respective signal has returned to Normal status, i.e. the condi- NORM
unacknowledged tions having caused the alarm are no longer present, but the alarm S NORM
has not been acknowledged. The alarm is still displayed in the Alarm
List.
The alarm only needs to be acknowledged, no remedial action
required.
29.
Table E / 2 Alarm states
3.6.2 Alarm Priorities
In the MCS Platinum, there are 4 differnet priorities for events and alarms on monitoring channels:
- Priority 1-3 indicate an alarm, priority 1 indicates the most severe alarm.
- Priority 4 is the lowest priority and indicates an event.
3.6.3 Alarm Ranking
LED indications, buzzer sounds, etc. draw the personnel's attention and inform about alarms and events
in the MCS Platinum. The way an alarm or event is indicated depends on the condition causing the alarm
or event. The ranking (overall priority) applied in cases where more than one condition is present at a
time is as follows:
E-28 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

1. All Operators Call

2. Alarm announcement/duty call
3. Duty officer/officer/engineer selection
4. Switching between "Attended WS" and "Unattended WS"
5. Assist call
6. Illegal key pressed
The above list also represents the rank of priority applied in cases where more than one condition is
present at a time which causes an alarm or event. In such cases the condition with the highest priority
will decide on the buzzer's sound pattern and other types of signals. For example, the alarm pattern of
an All Operators Call will always override the signal which is output when switching to "Unattended WS".
3.7 Overruling Output – Suppressing Alarms/Simulating Output Values
In some cases, the engineer may want to suppress an alarm, e.g. if the sensor is malfunctioning or if
work is carried out that may cause undesired alarms. For this purpose the MCS Platinum provides the
Manual Cut-Out feature which will suppress the complete alarm detection and announcement for a
specific monitoring channel. The channel is then listed in the Manual Cut-Out List. In other cases, it can
also be useful to simulate an output value of a monitoring channel rather than suppressing it, see 3.7.3
below. The respective suppressed or simulated channels can be displayed in separate lists:
- Manual Cut-Out List containing all of the monitoring channels which are manually cut-out by the
operator,
- Automatic Cut-Out List containing the monitoring channels which are automatically cut-out by
external input signals, as well as the
- List of simulated channels.
The lists provide the operator with a fast overview of the alarm channels which are suppressed or simu-
lated.
3.7.1 Manual Cut-Out
A manual Alarm Cut-Out refers to a monitoring channel and can be activated from the Watch Station
and from the Local Operator Panel after having entered the correct password. See chapter 5.6 on page
55. This causes all alarms for the channel to be suppressed.
The function is useful in situations where e.g. a sensor is defective and the respective alarms shall be
suppressed until the sensor has been replaced. In this case, the alarm can be manually cut-out in order
to remove it from the Alarm List. Thus, by manually suppressing the alarm channels which cannot be
normalised, the Alarm List will only contain alarm channels which shall result in action. The Cut-Out List,
which can be displayed on the panels and MFDs (PC-stations), shows information on Alarm Cut-Outs, i.e.
about suppressed alarm channels.
If you wish suppress (cut out) a specific alarm channel you have to adjust the channel parameters of
that alarm channel accordingly. See chapter 5.10 on page 61.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-29

3.7.2 Automatic Cut-Out
Cut-Outs can also be automatic, i.e. the MCS Platinum will disable the alarm automatically in defined situ-
ations. Such a situation could be to cut-out the low F.O. press. when the main engine is stopped, and
the function is a part of the specification for the F.O. press. monitoring channel.
The automatic Cut-Out also refers to a monitoring channel and is selected when the channel is defined
during system configuration. In contrast to the manual Cut-Out, the automatic Cut-Out does not suppress
the channel supervision alarm, only the defined alarm status are suppressed. When an automatic Cut-
Out is triggered for a monitoring channel, then the monitoring channel will be listed in the Automatic
Cut-Out List at all times, independent of the alarm status of that channel.
3.7.3 Simulation
If it is necessary, e.g. in order to force an alarm or to suppress an alarm on a specific monitoring channel
for fault finding purposes, an output value can also be simulated. That means that the actual value is
overwritten and replaced by a value entered by the user. When you simulate an output value, an existing
alarm ends or the manually entered value may result in an alarm on the respective monitoring channel.
This alarm then has to be treated as any other alarm.
A Manual Cut-Out (see section 3.7.1 on page E 29) will always overrule a simulated value. Thus, you
cannot generate an alarm by simulating a value if the respective monitoring channel is suppressed by a
Manual (or also by an Automatic) Cut-Out.
3.8 Alarm Groups
An alarm will in most configurations not be presented to the engineer only as an alarm in general. Also,
an alarm group LED will light up so that engineers can quickly determine the nature of the alarm. If,
e.g., it comes from the main engine, pumps, power plant, bridge, fire, etc., this will be indicated by the
respective alarm group LED. The MCS Platinum can handle up to 100 alarm groups and each individual
alarm may be assigned to a maximum of four of these groups at a time. The DAP can display 10 of the
alarm groups.
While the alarm LED will be active only at the panels to which alarms are directed, the alarm group LEDs
are never suspended. These will always display the status of the alarm group to which they are assigned.
The alarm groups can have the following status values:
Alarm Status Comment
No Alarms and no unacknowledged This status indicates trouble-free operation.

alarms in group The respective LED is off.
Alarm in group. The respective LED is continuously on.

(all alarms acknowledged) This status includes "signal validity failure" (sensor
failure). The status is intended for use as an acti-
vation signal to output channels which are used in
connection with it, e.g. the slowdown functions.
Unacknowledged alarms in group The respective LED flashes. The flashing indicates
that there are unacknowledged alarms in the alarm
group.
Table E / 3 Alarm group status values
E-30 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

The DAP panels contain 10 LEDs for indication of up to 10 of the 100 alarm groups. The LEDs are inde-
pendently and individually assigned for display of the respective information. See chapter 2.5 on page 14.
☞ NOTE:
Please note that the indication of the alarm groups will not necessarily be the same on all DAP. For
example, the alarm groups indicated on the Duty Alarm Panel Bridge may differ from the alarm
groups indicated on the Duty Alarm Panels Accommodation which are located in the cabins of the
duty officers. In addition, the alarm groups can be displayed on the MFD(s).
3.9 Alarm Output Organisation – Duty Watch System
This section describes the alarm output organisation in the MCS Platinum including the concepts and
principles of
- Selectable Watch Station
- Unattended Watch Station status
- Duty officer/engineer and backup officer/engineer
- Duty LED
- Duty Call – alarm routing to inform the person on duty, see section 3.10.1 on page E 32.
- Alarm escalation
It is important to understand the roles and interaction of Watch Station, duty person, as well as bridge
and accommodation alarm systems in order to be able to operate the MCS Platinum properly. The above
principles ensure that all alarms are routed as desired in order to be able to leave areas of the ship unat-
tended if this is required. Also, it is ensured that acknowledgement, i.e. taking notice of alarms, is
enforced. This way, all alarms will be noticed and dealt with within a specified time.
3.9.1 Selectable Watch Station
The Watch Station (WS) is the location, i.e. a specific DAP panel, which has the watch responsibilty. This
means that all alarms in the area of responsibility of the WS have to be acknowledged on that specific
panel.
As a standard, there is only one Duty Alarm Panel Bridge (DAP) on the bridge. However, in installations
where the design of the bridge requires this, a number of DAPs can be used. It might also be that the
system configuration includes more Watch Stations than the usual DAP Watch Stations in the ECR and
on the bridge, for example in the Cargo Control Room (CCR). In such cases the MCS Platinum can be
customised in a way that the alarms can be acknowledged either from the ECR or from the CCR. See
chapter 2.5 on page 14. This function is called Selectable Watch Station and is operated from the DAPs.
The Selectable WS function can also be used in system configurations which include several alarm
systems. If there is, e. g, a separate cargo alarm system defined in the MCS Platinum, the WS for a
different alarm system can be transferred to the cargo control room when the ship is in harbour. This
way, e.g. also the engine alarms can be supervised and acknowledged from the CCR when the CCR is
attended.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-31

3.10 Unattended Watch Station
Using the MCS Platinum it is possible to operate the vessel with so-called "unattended machinery area"
(sometimes also called unmanned machinery area). However, alarm messages in sensible areas like the
machinery area still need to be taken notice of. Hence, a person must be defined as duty, see 3.10.1
below. The alarm output is organised in a way that the Watch Station in an unattended area is set to
the so-called unattended status. In the unattended status, the respective alarms are routed to the Duty
Alarm Panel (Accommodation Alarm Panel) in the cabin of the respective responsible duty officer/engi-
neer and in public rooms, as well as to the Duty Alarm Panel (Bridge). This way, the responsible persons
on duty will be informed about alarms, even if they are not in the respective machinery area. For safety
reasons, there will be an All Operators Call if an alarm is not responded to, i.e. if an alarm is not acknowl-
edged within a defined time.
When a duty engineer (see 3.10.1 below) has been selected, all alarms will be announced on the
- DAP Bridge
- DAP Accommodation in the cabin of the duty officer/engineer
- DAPs Accommodation in public rooms
This will meet the requirements for sailing with unattended machinery area. As an alternative, the
MCS Platinum can be customised in a way that it is possible to select Unattended Watch Station without
having any engineer on duty. See chapter 2.5 on page 14.
To select and deselect the Unattended Watch Station status, a request is made from the Watch Station.
The request may either be accepted or rejected by the bridge. Also, the Watch Station may cancel the
request. If Unattended Watch Station is selected, the acoustic alert is output on the bridge when an
alarm occurs, informing the navigator about alarms while the ship is sailing. The navigator can also
monitor whether the alarms are processed. For that purpose, his DAP Bridge will show if the alarms are
acknowledged by the engineer on duty.
When an alarm occurs, the buzzer will also sound on the bridge, but the navigator can stop it locally by
pressing [STOP HORN] on the Duty Alarm Panel Bridge. However, this will only stop the buzzer on the
bridge and will not affect buzzers or horns anywhere else, and this will not actually acknowledge the
alarm, see also section 3.10.3 on page E 33.
3.10.1 Selecting Duty Officer/Engineer and Backup Officer/Engineer
For example, an engineer can be selected as duty engineer. The duty selection must be acknowledged.
This is done from the cabin of the responsible engineer who is selected to be on duty. As an alternative,
the MCS Platinum can be customised in a way that the duty selection can be acknowledged from the
Watch Station directly. See chapter 2.5 on page 14.
Per alarm system, only one officer/engineer can be selected as duty at a time. Any alarm of the respec-
tive alarm system will be output on the panel in the cabin of the person selected as duty. An officer or
engineer can be selected as duty and/or backup from a predefined DAP (Watch Station).
When,e.g., selecting a duty engineer, the buzzer of the Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation in the engi-
neer's cabin will sound. This must be acknowledged on the panel. Alternatively, the MCS Platinum can
be customised in a way that the duty selection can be acknowledged from the panel from where the
selection was initiated.
A backup duty officer/engineer can be selected in the same way. The MCS Platinum system can be
customised in a way that the backup duty is notified in case that the person on duty does not respond
to an incoming alarm, or if a deadman alarm is triggered.
E-32 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

3.10.2 Duty LED
The Duty LED on the panels is used for the following purposes:
- Indicate that a duty officer/engineer has been selected
- Indicate that a duty call is unacknowledged
- Indicate that a duty selection is in progress
The following table gives detailed information of the indication on the various Duty Alarm Panels (DAP).
Function of the DAP Duty Call / Duty Function
Duty Selection: Active:
LED will... Duty LED is...
Watch Station (WS) Flash ON
Bridge - Attended WS selected Flash ON
Bridge - Unattended WS / bridge standby Flash ON
selected
Public Room - Duty selected Flash ON
Public Room - No duty is selected Flash
Cabin panel, duty officer/engineer Flash ON
Cabin panel, not duty officer/engineer Flash OFF
Table E / 4 Output of the Duty LED
When the LED is ON, it means the panel will give an audible signal when an alarm occurs. When the
lamp is flashing, it is a way to draw the attention to the panel because user input is required, e.g.,
acknowledging the duty officer/engineer.
3.10.3 Duty Call
The person selected as duty can move freely around the ship's accommodation area, although he is on
duty. In case of a new alarm, the MCS Platinum provides selective, automatic alarms in the accommo-
dation area. Selective means that alarms will be specifically directed to the Duty Alarm Panels Accommo-
dation in the duty officer’s/engineer’s cabin and in the public rooms as well as on the Duty Alarm Panel
on the bridge. This way, the person on duty will always notice an alarm, regardless of whether he is in
his cabin or in any of the public rooms.
Such alarms are referred to as duty call. A duty call is announced as alarm on the following panels:
- Watch Station
- Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation in the duty officer’s/engineer’s cabin
- Duty Alarm Panels Accommodation operating as public room panels
- Duty Alarm Panel Bridge
- Possibly on additional Duty Alarm Panels Accommodation
Any of the DAPs located in the cabins of the duty officers/engineers can be brought to function as
Duty Alarm Panel (Accommodation) for public rooms. This way, a cabin panel which is not selected
to be on duty, can still be selected to give alert as the alarms occur, either with a short tone or with
constant sound. This can, e.g., be used by the Chief Engineer if in a special situation he wishes to
monitor the alarms, or if a duty officer/engineer visits cabins other than his own. The function is
selected from each individual cabin panel, see instructions for panel setup. See chapter 5.12 on page
74.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-33

In case of a duty call, the panels respond in the following way:

- The buzzer sounds.
- The ALARM LED flashes.
- The DUTY LED flashes.
Acknowledging a Duty Call

In response to a duty call, the person on duty must perform the same actions as for other alarm
announcements, i.e. first stop the horn or buzzer, and then acknowledge the alarm at the Watch Station.
If the duty acknowledges ([STOP HORN]) the duty call on the panel in his cabin or in a public room, the
horn or buzzers in the accommodation area and on the bridge will be stopped. However, this will not be
interpreted as the actual acknowledgement of the duty call. Thus, the duty officer/engineer must actually
go to the Watch Station to stop the horn in the engine room and acknowledge all alarms. See chapter
5.17.2 on page 107.
3.10.4 Alarm Escalation – All Operators Call
In case alarms (incl. duty calls) are not acknowledged by an engineer or officer within a predetermined
time (typically 5 minutes) an All Operators Call will be announced on all panels connected to the
MCS Platinum, regardless of whether a person is selected as duty or not. This is often also referred as
"5 min. alarm". The buzzers and horns start to sound, and these can be stopped by the acknowledging
all alarms on the Watch Station only. The All Operators Call is output on the following panels:
- All Duty Alarm Panels Accommodation operating as public room panels
- All Duty Alarm Panels Accommodation in the cabins
- Watch Station and all Duty Alarm Panels which could be selected as Watch Station
- LOPs
The panels respond in the following way:
- The Alarm LED flashes.
- The buzzer sounds (alarm sound).
When an All Operators Call is initiated, then the buzzers cannot be stopped locally. All buzzers are on
until all alarms have been acknowledged from the Watch Station.
3.11 How Alarms Are Indicated on Panels
The alarms are indicated to the engineer or officer in three ways, by:
- Buzzer
- Lamps
- Display
The display information can be accessed quickly because you only need to press one key to switch to
the Alarm List. The Alarm List shows all present alarms and also alarms which are not present but have
not yet been acknowledged. The indication by the lamps includes the alarm LED and the 10 alarm group
LEDs on the panels which together serve to give a quick overview of the current situation.
E-34 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

The alarm LED is used in conjunction with the announcement of the new alarms. It can have two states:
- It will flash when unacknowledged alarms are present.
- It is off when no unacknowledged alarms are present.
The exception is the Alarm LED on the Local Operator Panel, e.g. in the engine room. It will be steadily
on in case of any present acknowledged alarms, providing an overview of the FPDs with channels in
alarm condition.
The behaviour of the buzzer and the Alarm LED depends on the actual mode of the MCS Platinum. As a
general rule, buzzer and LED are off when all alarms have been properly acknowledged on the Watch
Station. The individual behaviour of the buzzer and the alarm LED when a new alarm occurs is described
in the following table.
Panel Situation Buzzer Alarm LED Effect of [STOP HORN]

(Boundary Conditions of the
Alarm Situation)
Watch all ON Flashes Stops all MCS Platinum

Station horns and buzzers.
Bridge Attended Watch Station OFF1 OFF1 Stops buzzer locally.
Unattended Watch Station / ON Flashes Stops buzzer locally.

bridge stand-by selected
Public room Duty officer/engineer ON Flashes Stops buzzer locally.

selected
Duty officer/engineer not OFF OFF No effect.

selected
Officer/ Officer/engineer on duty ON Flashes Stops local-, bridge- and

engineer public room buzzers.
cabin
Officer/engineer not on duty Off OFF No effect.
LOP ON Flashes Stops local buzzer

(acknowledging all alarms
will stop other buzzers).
Table E / 5 Alarm LED and buzzer reactions in response to a new alarm
1) Alarms may be defined as "always announced on bridge". See chapter 2.5 on page 14. Such
alarms will always start the buzzer on the bridge and will cause a flashing alarm LED.
The description of the alarm announcement on the panels in the following sections is focusing on the
announcement of individual alarms and not on troubleshooting.
☞ NOTE:
Please note that alarms will normally be included in an alarm group which will also be indicated on
the panels. Also, alarms will be presented as duty calls if a duty officer/engineer is selected.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-35

3.11.1 Alarm Announcement on the Local Operator Panel
When a new alarm is detected in the FPD to which the Local Operator Panel (LOP) is connected, the
following will happen on the LOP:
- The Buzzer starts to sound.
- The Alarm LED starts flashing.
Pressing [STOP HORN] on the LOP will stop the buzzer here, but no other buzzer or alarm horn in the
MCS Platinum is affected unless all of the alarms can be and are acknowledged from the LOP. In that
case, all active buzzers or horns in the MCS Platinum are stopped. When the buzzer has been stopped,
the alarm channels shown on the display can be acknowledged by pressing [ACKN ALARM]. The indica-
tion of the LOP’s Alarm LED has the following meaning:
- OFF:No alarms present at all
- Flashing: Unacknowledged alarms present
3.11.2 Alarm Announcement on the Watch Station
On the Watch Station (WS), the alarms are always announced in the following way:
- The buzzer starts to sound.
- The Alarm LED flashes.
When [STOP HORN] is pressed, all active buzzers are stopped. The Alarm LED will continue flashing as
long as unacknowledged alarms are present. Otherwise the Alarm LED is off. When [STOP HORN] was
pressed it is possible to acknowledge the alarms shown on the display. This is done by pressing [ALARM
ACKN].
3.11.3 Alarm Announcement on the Duty Alarm Panel Bridge
The alarm announcement on the bridge depends on whether Unattended Watch Station is selected or
not.
Case 1: Unattended Watch Station

When Unattended WS is selected, all alarms are announced on the bridge as follows:
- The buzzer starts to sound.
- The ALARM LED flashes.
The buzzer on the bridge is stopped when:
- [STOP HORN] is pressed on the bridge.
- [STOP HORN] is pressed on the WS.
The Alarm LED will continue flashing as long as the unacknowledged alarms are present.
☞ NOTE:
Acknowledging the alarms is possible from the Watch Station only.
E-36 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

Case 2: Attended Watch Station

When Attended WS is selected, the alarms with the attribute "always announced on the bridge" will be
announced on the bridge. This type of alarms must, just like any other alarm, also be acknowledged from
the Watch Station.
3.12 Calling System for Engineers (Assist Call)
This system is an integrated part of the MCS Platinum and serves to call individuals or a group of persons
(all engineers, all officers) for help from Duty Alarm Panels (possible Watch Stations, Accommodation)
and from Local Operator Panels, if included on the FPDs. See chapter 5.13 on page 82.
On the panels which are located in the public rooms, both the information "who is called" and "to where"
(i.e. the requesting location, e.g., engine room) are available on the LCDs. This way, the called engineer
knows that he has to contact a specific location needing assistance, regardless of his own current loca-
tion. This function enables the engineers to call for assistance both from the bridge, from the engine
control room, and from the FPDs, if a LOP is included.
3.13 Deadman Alarm Systems
The MCS Platinum can handle up to four independent deadman alarm systems. A deadman system basi-
call is a timer (countdown) which has to be reset in time. The timer is reset using external separate reset
push buttons, by pressing a button on a specified Duty Alarm Panel, or by moving the tackball of the
MFD on the Watch Station. If a deadman alarm system timer is not reset regularly, then an alarm will
be triggered. At first, a deaman warning is output followed by a deadman alarm, if there is no response
to the warning. See chapter 5.16 on page 102.
3.14 MCS Platinum Printing Features
The MCS Platinum can manage up to two printers to print the following types of lists:
- Alarm/Event Log
detailing changed alarm / event status, error messages, changed Cut-Out status, password input,
information on duty officers/engineers and Unattended WS, as well as changes in system date and
time.
- Alarm List
covering the contents of the Alarm List, i.e. all present and unacknowledged alarms in the alarm
system at the moment when the report is triggered.
- Cut-Out List
covering the contents of the Cut-Out List, i.e. all channels which have the automatic or manual Cut-
Out status.
- Datalog
detailing channel data. For analog channels the current value is output. For binary channels and
event channels, the respective status is output.
- Command List printout
prints the manoeuvre log
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-37

The Alarm/Event Log is running continuously, but it may be interrupted shortly by reports of the other
types. Printing of the other types of reports can be started by the operator. They can also be automat-
ically printed by the system at regular intervals. Printers are operated using the Duty Alarm Panel. See
3.14.1 Printer Operating Modes
The reports can be divided into two groups with respect to mode of operation.
Group 1: Alarm/Event Log
Group 1 reports continuously run on the printers to which they are assigned, and they can be stopped
only by disabling the assignment to the respective printer.
Group 2: Alarm List Reports
Cut-Out List Reports
Datalogs
Group 2 reports can be run from the DAP both at the WS and on the bridge. Group 2 reports can be
manually started by the operator from the DAP or automatically. Automatic printing is specified by a
setup procedure from a DAP. The printing times are specified by means of a start time and a time
interval. If the time interval is zero, no automatic printing will take place. See chapter 5.14 on page 85.
3.14.2 Printer Selection
Any report can be assigned individually to either printer 1, printer 2 or to no printer at all. The assign-
ments are specified in a setup procedure. The printer setup can be changed by the operator on the DAP
of the WS.
Managing Different Reports on One Printer

Different reports can share the same printer. All of the reports in group 2 consist of a finite number of
pages. These reports are simply printed one-by-one. The Alarm/Event Log, however, is in principle infi-
nite as the alarms can occur or return to Normal status at any time, and this is then recorded in the log.
Printing of the other types of reports may interrupt printing of the Alarm/Event Log. During this inter-
ruption, the alarms and events for the Alarm/Event Log are stored in an internal buffer (buffer size: 75
lines). When such an interrupting report is completed, then the buffer will be printed on a new page of
the Alarm/Event Log before any other report is permitted to interrupt printing of the Alarm/Event Log.
In the very rare case that the buffer overflows while a different report is printed, any additional alarms
and events are lost until the printer is available again. Lost alarms and events are marked in the Alarm/
Event Log at the position, where they are missing.
3.14.3 Printer Hardware Requirements
The printers must at least meet the following min. requirements:

- 19200 baud
- 8 data bits
- Even parity
- 80 characters per line
E-38 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

- 60 lines per page

- Ready / busy signal
The printers must be able to supply a ready / busy signal. From the point of view of the FPD, this
signal must be busy, if the printer is offline, without power, or if it is missing or not connected.
3.14.4 Printer Time-Out
If a printer has been in busy status for more than 2 minutes it is regarded as having failed, and a printer
alarm is generated. The busy status can be caused by e.g.
- Paper out
- Power off
- Missing connection to the FPD
When a printer fails, any report or part of a report which was sent prior to the failure may be lost
because the contents of the buffer in the printer might not have been printed at the time of the printer
failure.
Alarms and other events for an Alarm/Event Log will be kept in an internal buffer (buffer size: 75 lines)
in the FPD until the printer becomes ready again or until there is an overflow of the internal buffer.
Whenever it is possible to detect loss of events for an Alarm/Event Log, this will be indicated in the log
at the position where the alarms and events may be missing.
See also separate information on alarm messages.
3.15 Standard Function Blocks
The MCS Platinum comprises flexible Standard Function Blocks (SFBs) for manual and/or automatic
control of machinery components such as valves, motor starter pumps, air compressors, and diesel
engines. By use of closed loop controllers, the MCS Platinum monitors and controls important process
parameters, e.g. temperature and pressure values, liquid levels, and liquid flows.
Standard Function Blocks are gathered in Control Groups, and mimic diagrams provide the basic control
and monitoring information. The number and type of Control Groups depend on the system requirements
of the actual installation.
Standard Function Blocks are the standard software modules of the MCS Platinum. Standard Function
Blocks are available for a variety of individual machinery components (e.g. motor starters, diesel engines
etc.). Each Standard Function Block includes a process interface and a human machinery interface (HMI).
An Integration Manager tool defines if an input/output channel is only connected to the Alarm System,
or included in a Standard Function Block with other channels.
A Standard Function Block is the combination of a graphical representation of the current condition of a
controlled machinery component and its corresponding control program in the Central Processing Module.
Standard Function Blocks are available for machinery components such as:
- Valves
- Motor/Pump starters
- Ventilation fan starters
- Master/Stand-by pump controls
- Air compressor controls
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-39

- Running hour counters

- PID Controllers
- Pulse counters for liquid flow measurement
- Tank level gauging with conversion table
- Ship's draft, trim and list indication
- Indication of analog values
- Alarm indications
Standard Function Blocks are operated by a track ball or a standard PC mouse on the mimic diagrams.
Pop-up menus with available commands can be opened by selecting the Standard Function Block graph-
ical representations with the pointing device.
For further description of the software modules, please refer to the MCS Platinum Standard Function
Blocks Description. The operation is descirbed in the chapter dealing with the MCS Platinum applicaiton.
3.16 Interface to External Applications
Data Received via Serial Interface

The MCS Platinum can receive data such as analog values and alarms via a serial interface from, e.g., a
tank radar system. The data will then be processed by the MCS Platinum in the same way as the alarms
and events which are defined based on individual digital and analog I/O-channels.
Data Transmitted via Serial Interface

The MCS Platinum can transmit data like tank levels on request via a serial interface to, e.g., a Loading
Computer.
E-40 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

NACOS Platinum E-4 General Description of the Operator Panels
4 General Description of the Operator Panels
This chapter describes the basic layout, as well as controls and display elements of the operator panels
used, which form the user interface or Human Machine Interface (HMI) of the NACOS Platinum. The
expression "user interface" refers to the various ways in which a system communicates with its operator.
This is often also referred to as MMI or User-IF. In this section you will find a short introduction to the
MMI of a SAM Electronics NACOS Platinum Alarm System giving you a general understanding of the
philosophy it is based on.
Sounds (horns or buzzers), indications (lamps or LEDs), clear text (panel displays), and graphical pres-
entation (MFDs) are used to present information to the user. In order to make sure that the user is made
aware that his attention is required, the NACOS Platinum will output signals using horns and buzzers
whenever a change in the alarm system environment takes place. In addition, the sound pattern will give
the user an idea of what has happened.
Such changes may be the occurrence of new alarms, duty calls, watch changes, etc., and any such call
for attention will always require the operator’s response. In general, the operator will respond by using
dedicated keys on the operator panels which serve for clearly defined purposes, e.g. [STOP HORN] or
[ACKN. ALARM]. In the same way, the user may view various detailed information in the NACOS Platinum
by using a few simple key-strokes. Hence, the NACOS Platinum provides an overview of the system envi-
ronment from one single location:
LCD, see 4.3 on page E 43
Softkeys,
see 4.4
on page E 44
Function keys, Alphanumeric keys, Cursor and select keys, see

see 4.4 on page E 44 see 4.4 on page E 44 4.4 on page E 44
Fig. E / 8 Example of a panel
The different types of operator panels and the respective available functions and features are described
in sections 4.1 and 4.2. The individual main components and assemblies of the panels are described in
sections 4.3 to 4.7.
Passwords protect the system against any unintentional use of essential functions or against changing
parameters. See chapter 5.6 on page 55. This means that only crew members having special user priv-
ileges can access these functions and that the general staff with basic user privileges can operate the
system without the fear of "messing things up".
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-41

E-4 General Description of the Operator Panels NACOS Platinum
4.1 Operator Panel Types
Three types of panels are available for the NACOS Platinum:

- Duty Alarm Panels (DAP Bridge, ECR, CCR, see section 4.2.1)
- Duty Alarm Panels Accommodation (DAP, see section 4.2.2)
- Local Operator Panels (LOP, see section 4.2.3)
The DAPs are stand-alone panels. The Duty Alarm Panel Bridge, ECR and CCR can be equipped with a
PC-based MFD (MFD, see chapter 6) which serves as an enhancement to the DAP, giving the user an
extended overview on a large screen presenting more information at a glance. The MFD is described
separately in chapter 6. The LOP is an optional user interface which is, e.g., mounted directly on the
front of the FPD cabinet. Other installation variants are possible.
The main difference between the Local Operator Panel (LOP) and the DAP is the fact that using the LOP,
the operator can. e.g. only acknowledge the monitoring channels which are defined in the related Field
Processing Device to which the LOP is connected only, not the entire NACOS Platinum system. DAPs are
normally used at the following locations:
- On the bridge (Duty Alarm Panel Bridge)
- In the ECR, where the DAP is used as Watch Station
(alternatively, CCR panel can be Watch Station)
- In public rooms (normally Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation)
- In officers’/engineers’ cabins (normally Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation)
During the periods when the engine room / ECR is manned, the alarms are announced and acknowl-
edged from the Duty Alarm Panel ECR or the related LOP. When the engine room / ECR is unmanned,
i.e. in Unattended status, the Duty Alarm Panels Accommodation enable the system after acknowledge-
ment to distribute the alarm announcement to the duty officer’s/engineer’s cabin, to the public rooms,
and to the bridge.
4.2 Main Components of the Different Operator Panel Types
The various operator panels are similar with a few exceptions only. This section lists the components and
features which are available for each specific panel type.
4.2.1 Duty Alarm Panel (Bridge, ECR)
The panel consists of:

- Four line LCD display with adjustable backlight. See chapter 5.2 on page 47.
- Buzzer
- Alarm LED
- Keypad
- Alarm Group LEDs
The protection class is IP 44. For layout drawings of the panel please refer to the delivery documents.
E-42 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

4.2.2 Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation

- Two line LCD display
- Buzzer
- Alarm LED
- Keypad
- Alarm Group LEDs
The protection class is IP44. For layout drawings of the panel please refer to the delivery documents.
4.2.3 Local Operator Panel (LOP)

- Four line LCD display
- Buzzer
- Alarm LED
- Keypad
The protection class is IP44 unless installed using a rubber sealing, then it is IP56. For layout drawings
of the panel please refer to the delivery documents.
4.3 Display (LCD)
The Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation has a two-line display. The other DAPs and the LOPs have a four-
line LCD-type display. The LCDs are protected by the front of foil of the panels. The LCD can output text
and numeric data. The operator panels can display positive and negative numeric values ranging from
0.0001 to 99999. A numeric value always requires seven (7) characters on the LCD, and it consists of:
- 1 to 5 digits
- Decimal point, when specified
- Algebraic sign (+/-)
If the number of the decimal places presented is smaller than the precision of the actual value the
presented value is rounded, e.g. 12.44 is displayed as 12.4, 12.45 is displayed as 12.5. In these oper-
ating instructions the notation <value> specifies a numeric value displayed in the above defined standard
format.
☞ NOTE:
The range and resolution for a specific value depends on the definition of the presentation format,
as a value is specified to be presented with a fixed number of decimals related to the engineering
unit selected. See chapter 2.5 on page 14.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-43

4.4 Keypad
Using the keypad it is possible to select functions, enter text or numbers, and generally to communicate
with the NACOS Platinum. For detailed explanations, please refer to the operating instructions. See
LCD, see 4.3 on page E 43
Softkeys
Function keys Alphanumeric keys Cursor and select keys
Fig. E / 9 Panel keypad
The keys of the panel keypads are divided into the following functional groups:
- Softkeys, to select functions in menus
- Cursor and select keys, to navigate in lists, select items and confirm input
- Function Keys, to select defined functions
- Numeric keys, to enter alphanumeric values
The keypad is a membrane key design, so you will feel a soft click when pressing a key. Then display
and/or LED indications will respond accordingly.
4.5 LEDs
The LED indications draw the personnel's attention and inform about alarms and events in the NACOS
Platinum:
- Alarm LED
The Alarm LED indicates unacknowledged alarms.
- Fault LED
The Fault LED indicates a missing network connection of the panel.
E-44 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

- Fire LED
The Fire LED is part of a separate Fire Alarm system which is completely independent and physically
separated from the NACOS Platinum.
- Duty LED
The Duty LED functions together with both the [DUTY] function key and as a separate indication of
the automatic Duty Call functions. See chapter 5.12 on page 74.
- Watch LED
The Watch LED indicates that a panel is the Watch Station for an alarm system. See chapter 3.9 on
page 31.
- Alarm Group LEDs
The panels, except for the LOP, are able to display the status of ten different alarm groups via the
group alarm LEDs.
Further function key LEDs indicate that the respective function is active. This is explained in the respec-
tive sections.
4.6 Buzzer
The panels are equipped with a buzzer which, together with the respective LED indication, draws the
personnel's attention and informs about alarms and events in the NACOS Platinum. Depending on the
condition, which results in activation of the buzzer, the buzzer will sound with different patterns. The
sound will correspond to one of the patterns shown in the following figures.
Buzzer on
Buzzer off
Continuous buzzer sound

In a standard configuration, the continuous sound (see figure) is output in case of All Operator Alarms,
alarm announcement, Duty Call, Assist Call, and Lamp Test.
Buzzer on
Buzzer off
Buzzer pattern – on/off sequence

In a standard configuration, the on/off sequence sound pattern (see figure) is used in case of duty
officer/engineer selection or when switching between "Attended WS" and "Unattended WS / bridge
standby".
Buzzer on
Buzzer off
Buzzer sound – short single sound

In a standard configuration, a short single buzzer signal is output when you press an illegal key, i.e. a
key which is not useful or permitted in the current functional mode.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-45

This standard setup of sounds can be customised. The patterns can be assigned to different conditions.
However, the illegal key operation is always indicated by one single buzzer signal, see figure.
4.7 Backlight Dimmer
The Display of the DAP (bridge, ECR) has an adjustable backlight for LCD and LEDs so that you can
adapt the brightness to the light conditions in the room. The foil of the keypad is only lighted in case of
the Duty Alarm Panel Bridge. Adjusting the backlight and also adjusting the view angle are possible. See
4.8 Layout Drawings
For layout drawings, please refer to the overview drawings included in the delivery documents.
E-46 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

NACOS Platinum E-5 Operating Instructions for the Operator Panels
5 Operating Instructions for the Operator Panels
This chapter describes the procedures when operating the DAPs and LOPs of the NACOS Platinum. We
highly recommend that you read or at least have a glance at the introductory chapters 1 to 4 before
starting work. For basic descriptions of the controls and display elements of the different operator panels,
please refer to chapter 4, for descriptions of the function keys, refer to section 5.3.
This chapter is structured as follows:
- In the first sections, basic functions are described which are repeatedly required in various functional
modes.
- Sections 5.8 to 5.16 describe the individual keys and the menus and functions behind the keys.
- Finally, in section 5.17 on page E 105 the general alarm handling procedures are described.
These descriptions are based on the functional descriptions in the previous chapters.
☞ NOTE:
The figures shown in this chapter represent the four-line display. Duty Alarm Panels Accommodation
will display either the upper two lines or the bottom 2 lines only. If appl., use the cursor keys to
display the other lines.
5.1 Commissioning of the NACOS Platinum
Installation, customisation, configuration, as well as initial startup are carried out by SAM Electronics
according to the order specifications upon delivery of the NACOS Platinum. See chapter 2.5 on page 14.
Thus, this is not covered by these operating instructions.
5.2 Dimmer – Adjusting the Display
You can adjust the brightness of the backlight and the contrast of the DAP display as well as the intensity
of the LEDs to adapt the display to the light conditions in the room and to the viewing angle at which
you look at the display.
5.2.1 Adjusting the Backlight Intensity
Proceed as follows to adjust the brightness of the LCD’s backlight:

1. Press the [DIMMER] key. The LCD displays:
1 SELECT DIMMER FUNCTION

2
3 │S│LCD │S│VIEW │S│LED
4 │1│DISPLAY│2│ANGLE │3│DISPLAY
Fig. E / 10 Select dimmer function
A DAP Bridge will additionally have the option [S4] Background.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-47

E MACHINERY_panel_op.fm / 14.12.11
E-5 Operating Instructions for the Operator Panels NACOS Platinum
2. Press [S1] LCD Display.
1 ADJUST THE LCD INTENSITY

2
3 SETTING: ***...
4 ADJUST BY USE OF: ↑↓
Fig. E / 11 Adjusting the LCD intensity
The intensity can be adjusted in six steps. In the figure above, the intensity is set to the medium value
which is indicated by the asterisks (*) and dots.
Use the [ ] or [ ] key to increase the backlight intensity of the LCD.
Use the [ ] or [ ] key to reduce the backlight intensity.
When you reach the highest or lowest possible level, the buzzer will indicate this.
Press [ESC] to return to Basic mode.
5.2.2 Adjusting the View Angle
If the LCD is not at your eye level, e.g. because you do not stand but sit in front of the panel so that
you have look at it at an angle, you might find that the display is not clear. Proceed as follows to adapt
the contrast of the display to the view angle:
1. Press the [DIMMER] key.
2. Press [S2] View Angle to adjust the display’s contrast.
3. Use the [ ] and [ ] keys to adjust the optimum readability of the display.
If the panel’s mounting position is high, you will probably have to use the [ ] key, because you
look at the panel from below.
4. Press [ESC] to return to Basic mode.
5.2.3 Adjusting the LED Intensity
Proceed as follows to adjust the intensity of the LEDs on the panel:

2. Press [S3] LED Display.
The intensity can be adjusted in six steps. The current intensity is indicated by the asterisks (*) and
dots on the LCD.
3. Use the [ ] or [ ] key to increase the lighting intensity.
Use the [ ] or [ ] key to reduce the lighting intensity.
5.2.4 Adjusting the Background Lighting (Bridge Panel Only)
E-48 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

In case of the DAP Bridge, also the background lighting of the keys can be adjusted, i.e. the lighting of
the keys. Proceed as follows:
2. Press [S4] Background.
The intensity can be adjusted in six steps. The current intensity is indicated by the asterisks (*) and
dots on the LCD.
3. Use the [ ] or [ ] key to increase the lighting intensity.
Use the [ ] or [ ] key to reduce the lighting intensity.
5.3 Basic Panel Operation
This section provides information regarding navigating through NACOS Platinum functions and menus. It
explains how to call up functions, how to access information, and how to use the controls and display
elements of the panels.
5.3.1 Softkeys
The panels have four softkeys, which are located just below the display. The softkeys are only used in
some modes, and they serve for varying purposes. When enabled, the function of a key is shown on the
display in the following way:
1
2
3 │S│<soft │S│<soft │S│<soft │S│<soft
4 │1│keytxt>│2│keytxt>│3│keytxt>│4│keytxt>
Fig. E / 12 Softkeys on a DAP
The current function of the softkeys is shown in line 3 and 4. Line 1 and 2 can contain additional infor-
mation, depending on the current functional mode. On the Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation, line 3 and
4 are displayed only.
The <softkey txt> identifies the function of the softkey. If more than four functions are available for a
mode the softkey text for [S4] will be "MORE". When you press [S4], then the panel will display the next
set of softkeys.
5.3.2 [ESC] Key
The [ESC] key is a general quit or exit key. When you press [ESC], this will generally take you one step
up (backwards) in the tree structure (see 5.3.6 below) of the menus and functions. The current operation
is cancelled. If you press [ESC] while entering a numeric value, the value entered is discarded. If you
press [ESC] again after having cancelled all functions, then the buzzer will sound to indicate that it is no
longer useful to press [ESC].
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-49

5.3.3 [ENT] Key
The [ENT] key is the key used to accept or confirm input or a message. [ENT] is e.g. used to accept a
numeric value entered.
5.3.4 Arrow Keys
The functions of arrow keys on the panel keypad (up [ ], down [ ], left [ ], and right [ ]) depend
on the current functional mode. In some cases they will be used to step through list or menus, in other
cases they will be used to select items or set values. This will be indicated in the specific descriptions.
Navigating Through Lists

Some of the lists, e.g. the Alarm List, displayed in the NACOS Platinum may be too long to fit the four-
line and particularly the two-line LCDs. This is indicated by the and/or icons in the top right corner
of the LCD. Scrolling in such lists is not possible. You must press the [ ] and [ ] keys repeatedly to
step through lists. Scrolling by pressing and holding a button is not possible.
When you reach the end of a list, some lists will behave like a continuous conveyor belt and just start
from the beginning again. In case of other lists, the end of the list will be indicated by a text like
"<END OF LIST>" and in the top right corner of the display only the icon will be displayed. If you still
continue to press the [ ] key, then the buzzer will sound to remind you of the end of the list. This will
also happen at the start of the list.
5.3.5 [STOP HORN] & [ALARM ACKN] Keys
Never stop the horn and acknowledge parameters with the only aim to silence
the system. Ensure that alarms are handled properly and thoroughly.
Pressing [STOP HORN] causes the buzzer in the panel to stop except when it has been started by an All
Operators Call, see 5.17.3 P r o c e s s i n g a n A l l O p e r a t o r s C a l l on page E 108. After having pressed the
[STOP HORN] key, you can use the [ALARM ACKN] key on the Watch Station (and only there) to
acknowledge the unacknowledged alarms. If several new alarms are present, it is necessary to press the
[ALARM ACKN] key a number of times as you are only allowed to acknowledge one alarm at a time.
5.3.6 Function Keys
The panel functions are implemented as a number of operating modes, which are selected using dedi-
cated keys on the keypad. The only exception is the Basic mode. This mode is entered whenever the
NACOS Platinum is reset or when you press [ESC], possibly repeatedly.
The dedicated function keys for the functions and features of the system are located on the left side of
the panel. The function of the keys are predefined and do not vary. Using the function keys you can
immediately access a specific function or mode in the NACOS Platinum. The available keys on a panel
depend on the available functional modes of that particular panel. When one of the function keys is
E-50 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

pressed, the LED on the key will be illuminated for as long as the selected function is active. When
pressing one of the function keys the panel will enter the selected functional mode immediately, regard-
less of the current status of the panel.
The following table lists the available function keys:
Available at Functional Mode Key Description
DAP, LOP Basic mode No dedicated key See section 5.7 on page E 56.
DAP, LOP Alarm List [ALARM LIST] See section 5.8 on page E 57.
DAP, LOP Additional list [ADD. LISTS] See section 5.9 on page E 58.
DAP, LOP Display channel [DISPLAY CHANNEL] See section 5.10 on page E 61.
DAP, LOP Adjust channel [ADJUST CHANNEL] See section 5.10.6 on page E
67.
DAP which can be Watch Selection [WATCH] See section 5.11 on page E 71.
Watch Station
DAP Duty Call func- [DUTY] See section 5.12 on page E 74.
tions
DAP, LOP Assist Call [ASSIST CALL] See section 5.13 on page E 82.
DAP which can be Printer Control [PRINTER CONTROL] See section 5.14 on page E 85.
Watch Station
DAP, LOP Maintenance [MAINTENANCE] See section 5.15 on page E 93.
DAP which can be Deadman mode [DEADMAN] See section 5.16 on page E
Watch Station 102.
Table E / 6 Operator panel functions and function keys
The functional modes are organised in a tree structure, like a menu in a software application on a PC.
For an overview of the functional modes and menus behind the function keys, please refer to chapter 7
Q u i c k R e f e r e n c e – F u n c t i o n a l M o d e s a n d M e n u s o f P a n e l s on page E 133.
When one of the functional modes is selected the presentation on the LCD of the panel starts at level 1
of the structure. From this point the operator is guided through the tree structure by means of text and
softkeys. The following figure shows the simple structure of the Dimmer menu:
DIMMER
SELECT
DIMMER FUNCTION
LCD Display View Angle LED Display Background
Fig. E / 13 Example menu path of a functional mode – Dimmer
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-51

In the figure, the Background item is greyed out to indicate that this function is only available on Bridge
panels.
5.4 Entering Values on DAP Panels
Some of the NACOS Platinum functions require input of alphanumeric values, times, or dates. The proce-
dure of entering such values is described in the following sections.
5.4.1 Entering Alphanumeric Values
Some NACOS Platinum functions require input of alphanumeric values. The procedure is the very much
the same as when you enter text for a short message (SMS) on your mobile phone without using the
any input aids (e.g. T9). So, if the value contains alphabetic characters, you have to press the respective
numeric key repeatedly until the desired letter is displayed. For example, to enter a "P", you have to
press the numeric key [6] twice, and to enter the letter "X" you have to press the numeric key [8] 4
times. If you want to enter the same digit or letter again, you have to move the cursor using the [ ]
key. Otherwise, the desired number would not be entered twice in a row but the digit on that position
would be replaced by the respective letter.
For example, if you want to display the channel parameters of a specific monitoring channel, you can
call up the channel by entering the channel ID which is an alphanumeric value which may consist of up
to 8 characters. Press [DISPLAY CHANNEL] and then [S3] (see 5.10.1 on page E 62), then the system
prompts for input of the alphanumeric channel ID. The cursor is always placed on the first character posi-
tion on the left. In case of the channel ID, the ID of the last channel displayed is output as default value.
To enter a new ID, just overwrite that default value.
Input Example
For example, if you want to enter the value "1442A", proceed as follows:
1. Press numeric key [1] once.
The cursor will automatically move to the next position, i.e. the "4" is entered as second digit from
the left.
3. Press the [ ] key to move the cursor one position to the right.
If you do not press the arrow key but just press key [4] a second time, then the letter "J" will be
entered at the second position.
If you press the [ ] key to move the cursor one position to the right, this will not cause input errors
but it is not required because the next digit in the example is not 4.
The cursor will automatically move to the next position so that the "2" is entered at the correct posi-
tion behind the second 4.
6. Press numeric key [1] twice.
The cursor will automatically move to the next position, and the "A" is entered at the last position.
7. Press [ENT] to confirm the input.
E-52 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

☞ NOTE:
When you overwrite a default value which is longer than the value you wish to enter, then you
might have to delete the last digits or characters of the default value by overwriting it with SPACE,
i.e. you have to press [0] twice.
5.4.2 Entering Time Values
Time values are entered in the format HH:MM (or HH:MM:SS). The 24 hour format applies. Thus,
11:30 pm must be entered as 23:30. Example for a prompt to enter a time:
ENTER NEW TIME : 09:30:00
The cursor is positioned on the first digit on the left. Use the numeric keys to enter the desired time.
For example, to enter 23:30, press the numeric keys [2], [3], [3] and then press [ENT]. The cursor will
automatically step to the next digit.
Alternatively, you can use the [ ] and [ ] keys to move the cursor to a specific digit, and you can use
the [ ] and [ ] keys to adjust the value of the digit highlighted by the cursor. When you attempt to
adjust an invalid value, the buzzer will sound.
Notes on Input Errors

If you attempt to enter completely meaningless time values, e.g. 49:00, the panel will already reject the
"4" as first digit. However, if you attempt to enter 29:00, the system will automatically correct the input
to "19:00", i.e. the second digit is assumed to be correct. This also applies to the attempt to enter
"24:00" which is automatically changed to "14:00". Midnight must be entered as "00:00".
5.4.3 Entering Date Values
Date values are entered in the format MM.DD (or YY.MM.DD). Example for a prompt to enter a date:
ENTER NEW DATE : 08.10.01
The cursor is positioned on the first digit on the left. Use the numeric keys to enter the desired date.
For example, to enter 12 November 2008, press the numeric keys [0], [8], [1], [1], [1], [2], and then
press [ENT]. Only the last two difits of the year are entered. The cursor will automatically step to the
next digit while entering the numbers.
Alternatively, you can use the [ ] and [ ] keys to move the cursor to a specific digit, and you can use
the [ ] and [ ] keys to adjust the value of the digit highlighted by the cursor.
Notes on Input Errors

If you attempt to enter completely meaningless values, e.g. 25-49-38, the panel will reject the date
entered and output an error message:
*** DATE NOT VALID - PRESS [ESC] ***
Press [ESC] and enter the correct date.
5.5 Selecting Alarm Systems
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-53

In system configurations which include only one alarm system, this step is skipped. See chapter 2.5 on
page 14. However, in system configurations which include multiple alarm systems, in many cases you
will be prompted to select a specific alarm system when you select one of the main functional modes on
the panel. For example, when you press [ALARM LIST] on a DAP which is configured to have display
rights for all four alarm systems, the LCD displays the available alarm systems in the following way:
1 SELECT ALARM SYSTEM:

2 <alm> <alm> <alm> <alm>
3 │S│ <AL │S│ <AL │S│ <AL │S│ <AL
4 │1│ 1> │2│ 2> │3│ 3> │4│ 4>
Fig. E / 14 Selecting an alarm system
In the figure <AL 1> to <AL 4> identify the different alarm systems, and <alm> indicates the number
of present and unacknowledged alarms within each alarm system.
Example:
1 SELECT ALARM SYSTEM

2 17 2 6
3 │S│MACH │S│BRIDGE │S│CARGO
4 │1│ALM SYS│2│ALM SYS│3│ALM SYS
Fig. E / 15 Selecting an alarm system – example
Use the softkeys to select the desired alarm system. For example, you can press [S1] to view all 17
machinery alarms:
1 17 Alarms AlARM LIST MACH ALM SYS ↑↓

2 *M.E. Sea WATER COOL OUTLET TEMP HIGH
3 *CARGO PUMP 1 LEAKAGE ALM
4 *M.E. FUEL OIL INLET PRESSURE LOW
Fig. E / 16 Alarm List – example
The arrow keys in the top right corner indicate that you can use the [ ] and [ ] arrow keys to step
through the Alarm List and to view all entries. The youngest alarm is shown on the bottom line. When
you press [ ], the end of the list will be indicated by <END OF LIST>. For more information, refer to
section 5.8 on page E 57.
E-54 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

5.6 Password Protection – Privileged Access
Some of the panel functions are password-protected. In such cases, you will be prompted to enter a
password of a specific level. An operator panel can operate in four privileged access levels. Various sub-
functions of the main functional modes require that you enter the password of the respective level.
☞ NOTE:
Password-protected functions have a timer function. After entering a password, the panel will enter
the desired functional mode and the LED of the related key will flash. If you do not press any key
for a while, for safety reasons, the LED will stop flashing and the panel will automatically return to
a level in the functional modes which is not password-protected. That means, the panel would
behave as if [ESC] was pressed. In such cases, you will have to repeat the password input.
If the panel prompts for, e.g., password level 1, then the panel will also accept passwords of higher
levels. So, for level 1, the panel will accept the passwords of levels 1, 2, 3, or 4. In case password level
2 is prompted for, at least the level 2 password is required, but also level 3 and 4 passwords will work.
During everyday operation the operator panel is used for, e.g., alarm acknowledgement, display of
alarms, display of channel set up, i.e. functions which do not require privileged mode. The four privileged
levels serve for the following purposes:
- 1st privileged access level is used for, e.g., adjustment of alarm delays and making manual Cut-
Outs.
- 2nd privileged access level is used when more advanced changes are required. For example change
of the printer setup.
- 3rd privileged access level is available for control/adjustments of the deadman alarm system(s).
- 4th privileged access level is reserved for very special functions and to change passwords.
☞ NOTE:
The passwords configured during customisation will be handed out to you together with these oper-
ating instructions. Changing passwords is described in section 5.15.8 on page E 100. Changing pass-
words requires the password of the respective next higher privilege level. Except is level 4 which
requires level 4.
5.6.1 Entering a Password
When you select a function which requires a password, the password prompt is output on the LCD. It
indicates the required password level (1-4). Example:
ENTER PASSWORD - LEVEL 2: **
Fig. E / 17 Entering a password on a DAP
You can press [ESC] at any stage while entering a password. The system will then return to the mode
in which it was operating just before the password entry began. Use the numeric keys and softkeys to
enter the complete password. The cursor is placed on the first position of the password to be entered.
The input is hidden. That means that every time you press a key (except [ENT] or [ESC]), the cursor
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-55

will move one position to the right and an asterisk (*) is output in the line. Press [ENT] to confirm your
input. If the password consists of 6 digits, then you do not have to press [ENT]. The display will switch
to the desired function automatically after you have entered the correct sixth digit.
If the password is correct, the panel enters the corresponding password-protected mode or function, and
you can continue your operation. If the password is not correct, e.g., if you pressed the wrong keys or
if you pressed too many keys, the LCD displays:
ILLEGAL PASSWORD HAS BEEN ENTERED!
ENTER PASSWORD - LEVEL 2:
Fig. E / 18 Error message after of incorrect password
Just repeat the input, and press [ENT] to confirm the input.
☞ NOTE:
If the error message is displayed repeatedly although you are sure you entered the correct pass-
word, it might be that the password was changed. So if in doubt, ask you supervisor for changed
passwords.
5.7 Basic Mode (DAP, LOP)
On power-up (see section 5.1 on page E 47), of the panel, or reset of the FPD, the Basic mode will auto-
matically be selected. You can select the Basic mode at any time by pressing [ESC], possibly repeatedly.
In Basic mode, the panel displays:
Example:
1 * 12 ALARMS (M,B,C) CH(s) SUPP.

Fig. E / 19 Alarms displayed in Basic mode
The LOP will only display unacknowledged alarms present in the FPD to which the LOP is connected. The
Basic display shows:
- First Line:
If there is an asterisk (*) at the beginning of the first line, this indicates that there are unacknowl-
edged alarms in the NACOS Platinum.
- First line:
Total number of alarms, regardless of whether the alarms have already been acknowledged or not
E-56 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

- First line:
Alarm systems for which the panel has access rights, indicated by a single character. In a standard
configuration, the letters will have the following meaning:
M = Machinery alarms
B = Bridge alarms
C = Cargo alarms
R = Reefer alarms
This can be customised. See chapter 2.5 on page 14.
- First line:
If Manual Cut-Outs or simulated values are present, this is indicated by the text "CH(s) SUPP." on
the LCD.
- Second line onward:
Unacknowledged alarm(s), if any.
The latest (youngest) alarm is displayed in the bottom line. If there are more than 3 alarms, the
fourth alarm will not be displayed on the LCD. To view all alarms, check the alarm list, see section
5.8 on page E 57.
The asterisk (*) at the beginning of a line indicates that the alarm is unacknowledged.
For details on the respective alarm message texts, please refer to the relevant order documents.
☞ NOTE:
The individual messages are longer than the lines of the LCD. Use the [ ] and [ ] arrow keys to
display the respective hidden parts of the messages, e.g. to find out the ID number of the PLC (FPD)
an alarm belongs to.
5.8 Alarm List (DAP, LOP)
When you press [ALARM LIST], the panel enters the Alarm List mode. If more than one alarm system is
available, you will be prompted to select the desired alarm system, see section 5.5 on page E 53. The
Alarm List LED is on, when the panel operates in the Alarm List mode. The LCD displays, e.g.:
1 17 Alarms AlARM LIST MACH ALM SYS ↑↓

Fig. E / 20 Alarm List displayed on a DAP
The Alarm List includes all present and unacknowledged alarms. See chapter 3.6 on page 27. Duty Alarm
Panel Accommodation and LOP will display line 1 and 2 only. The alarms are listed in chronological order.
In the figure above, "M.E. FUEL OIL PRESSURE" is the youngest. The Alarm List shows:
- First line:
Total number of alarms, regardless of whether the alarms have already been acknowledged or not
- First line:
Name of the selected list: "ALARM LIST".
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-57

- First line:
Name of the selected alarm system: "MACH ALM SYS".
- First line:
If the text "CH(s) SUPP." is displayed on the LCD, this indicates that Manual Cut-Outs are present
in the NACOS Platinum, regardless of any alarm.
- First line:
The two arrows in the example indicate that you can use the [ ] and [ ] arrow keys to step
through the Alarm List and to view all entries.
- Second line onward:
The latest alarm(s), if any.
The respective latest (youngest) alarm is displayed in the bottom line.
The asterisk (*) at the beginning of a line indicates that the alarm is unacknowledged.
☞ NOTE:
The individual messages are longer than the lines of the LCD. Use the [ ] and [ ] arrow keys to
display the respective hidden parts of the messages, e.g. to find out the ID number of the PLC (FPD)
an alarm belongs to.
Using the [ ] and [ ] keys, you can page through the display so that the previous or next 3 alarms in
the list are displayed. [ ] will display older alarms, and [ ] will display newer alarms. When you reach
the start/end of the list, this is indicated by the text:
<START OF LIST>
or
<END OF LIST>
If no alarms are present in the list, the number of alarms is 0 and the line(s) used to display the alarm(s)
are blank.
5.9 Displaying Various Lists (DAP, LOP) [ADD. LISTS]
Using the [ADD. LISTS] key, you can display various lists such as
- Cut-Out Lists (Suppressed):
Simulated channels
Manual Cut-Outs
Automatic Cut-Outs
- Sensor and device fail lists
- Specific Alarm Lists:
Alarms of priority 1
Alarms of Priority 1 and 2
All Alarms
E-58 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

The selection procedure is very similar on all panel types. However, on LOPs, when you press [ADD.
LISTS] you have to select first, whether the desired list shall be limited to the local PLC or if it shall cover
the entire system:
1 SELECT LOCAL OR GLOBAL LIST:

2
3 │S│LOCAL │S│ENTIRE
4 │1│PLC │2│SYSTEM
Fig. E / 21 Add. Lists – selecting a list
If you select [S1] Local PLC, then only information are displayed which are related to the FPD the panel
belongs. If you select [S2] Entire System, then all alarms, cut-outs etc. of the entire NACOS Platinum
are displayed. However, in this case, it is not possible to acknowledge alarms related to other FPDs.
The remaining steps are the same for all panel types. You will be prompted to select the desired type
of list you wish to display:
1 SELECT LIST TYPE:
2 18 0 20
3 │S│SUP- │S│FAIL │S│ALARMS
4 │1│PRESSED│2│ │3│
Fig. E / 22 Add. Lists – selecting a list
The numbers in line 2 of the display indicate the total number of entries in the respective lists.
5.9.1 Suppressed – Manual & Automatic Cut-Outs/Simulations (DAP, LOP)
The Manual & Automatic Cut-Out Lists show all monitoring channels for which alarms are manually or
automatically suppressed. The list of simulated monitoring channels shows all channels the output values
of which are simulated by manually entered values. See chapter 3.7 on page 29. Proceed as follows:
1. Press [ADD. LISTS].
2. If you are working on a LOP, select [S1] Local PLC or [S2] Entire System.
3. Select [S1] Suppressed.
4. Use the softkeys to select the desired list:
[S1]: Simulated (list of simulated monitoring channels)
[S2]: Manual Cutout (Manual Cut-Out List)
[S3]: Auto-Cutout (Automatic Cut-Out List)
If a monitoring channel is both automatically and manually cut-out it will be presented in the Manual
Cut-Out List. If an alarm channel is unacknowledged, it will be shown in the Alarm List, regardless
of the Cut-Out status. It will not be displayed in the Cut-Out List until it has been acknowledged.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-59

5. Use the softkeys to select the desired alarm system.

The following example shows the Automatic Cut-Out List for the machinery alarm system:
1 * 18 Automatic Cut-outs MACH. ALM Sys ↑↓

2 M.E. EXH. GAS DEV TEMP CYL. 1 NORM
Fig. E / 23 Automatic Cut-Out List – example
In the example, 18 Automatic Cut-Outs are present. The asterisk (*) in line 1 indicates that unacknowl-
edged alarms are present in the respective alarm system. For descriptions on how to display and activate
the manual Cut-Out status in the channel parameters of a monitoring channel, refer to sections 5.10.3
to 5.10.6.
5.9.2 Fail – List of Sensor and Device Failures
The Sensor and Device Failure lists show alarm messages related to sensors and other equipment in the
NACOS Platinum. Proceed as follows:
3. Select [S2] Fail.
[S1]: Sensor Fail
[S2]: Device Fail
The following example shows the Device Fail list for the machinery alarm system:
1 9 Device Fails MACH. ALM Sys ↑↓

2 MODULE A4054 (AAM401) ERROR ?
3 PCS ALARM / POWER FAIL ?
4 EGS2200 COMM. ERROR ?
Fig. E / 24 Device Fail list – example
5.9.3 Alarms – Specific Alarm Lists
This is very much the same as the Alarm List mode called up using the [ALARM LIST] key. See chapter
5.8 on page 57. However, using the [ADD. LISTS] key you can specifically look up alarms of priority 1,
priority 1+2 alarms, or all alarms. See chapter 3.6.2 on page 28. This is indicated accordingly in the first
line of the display.
Proceed as follows:
3. Select [S3] Alarms.
E-60 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)


[S1]: priority 1 alarms only
[S2]: alarms of priority 1 and 2
[S3]: all alarms (same list as the Alarm List output using the [ALARM LIST] key)
The following example shows the Prio 1 Alarm list for the machinery alarm system:
1 4 Alarm Prio 1 MACH. ALM Sys ↑↓

2 ME SHUTDOWN ACTIVE
3 ME SHUTDOWN PREWARNING
4 ME EMERGENCY STOP
Fig. E / 25 Prio 1 Alarm list – example
The selected list is displayed. The type of alarm displayed (prio 1 in the example) is indicated in the first
line. In principle, the actual list is the same for all variants. See chapter 5.8 on page 57. Only the set of
alarms looked up varies.
5.10 Display Channel (DAP, LOP)
In Display Channel mode you can view and edit details on individual monitoring channels, e.g. when an
alarm of a monitoring channel is displayed in the Alarm List, or after you have selected a specific channel.
For example, you can look up the high and low limits of values such as the engine’s cylinder temperature
or the current actual temperatures of the cylinders. To enter the Display Channel, press the [DISPLAY
CHANNEL] key while the panel is in Basic mode. The Display Channel LED on the panel will then be on.
The following is displayed on the LCD:
1 USER ID: 14020

2
3 │S│ STEP │S│ STEP │S│ USER
4 │1│ ALL │2│ ANALOG│3│ ID
Fig. E / 26 Display Channel mode on a DAP
Alternative on 2-line display:

1 USER ID: 14020
2 │1│ ALL │2│ ANALOG│3│ ID
Fig. E / 27 Display Channel mode on a Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation
When the display in the figures above is called up, the User ID, which is sometimes also referred to as
channel number, is initially set to the last selected ID. In the example above, the User ID is 14020.
Selecting a channel
You can select an alarm channel to be displayed by
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-61

- Entering a channel identifier (in Display Channel mode, see section 5.10.1),
- Selecting a channel from the list of analog channels (in Display Channel mode, see section 5.10.2),
- Selecting a channel from a list of all alarm channels (in Display Channel mode see section 5.10.2),
or alternatively, by
- Selecting a channel when it is displayed, for example from the Alarm List, see section 5.10.3.
Viewing and Adjusting Channel Parameters

Viewing and Adjusting Channel Parameters is described in sections 5.10.4 and 5.10.6.
5.10.1 Selecting a Channel by Entering the Channel ID
See chapter 3.4.1 on page 24. Proceed as follows to select an alarm channel by entering the user ID:
1. Press [DISPLAY CHANNEL].
The panel enters the Display Channel mode.
2. Press [S3] to select the channel by entering the user ID.
The user ID is a text string which consist of 8 alphanumeric characters.
The cursor is placed on the first character position on the left.
3. Enter the desired channel number.
See chapter 5.4.1 on page 52.
4. When you have entered the desired channel, confirm it by pressing [ENT].
If the channel number entered is invalid, i.e. the NACOS Platinum does not have an alarm channel
with the ID entered, the LCD displays an error message. In that case, press [ESC] to repeat the
input.
The channel parameters of the selected alarm channel will now be displayed on the LCD. See chapter
5.10.4 on page 64.
5.10.2 Selecting a Channel Stepping Through Lists (Step Analog or Step All)
To select a channel from a list of, e.g., all or all analog alarms proceed as follows:
1. Press [DISPLAY CHANNEL].
The panel enters the Display Channel mode.
2. Use softkey [S2] Step Analog to call up a list of all analog channels which are defined in the system.
Alternatively, select [S1] Step All to step through all alarm channels which are defined in the system,
both analog and binary.
1 <chn id> <channel text>

2 PRESS [LEFT] FOR PREV., [RIGHT] FOR NEXT
3
4
Fig. E / 28 Stepping through the channels
3. Use the [ ] and [ ] keys to step through the list of channels.

<chn id> and <channel text> identify the channel by means of the channel’s User ID and the
respective description text.
E-62 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

4. When the channel to be displayed appears on the LCD, select the channel by pressing the [ENT]
key.
The channel parameters of the selected alarm channel will now be displayed on the LCD, see section
5.10.4.
5. Use the [ ] and [ ] keys to step through the list of channel details.
The text "END OF DISPLAY CHANNEL" indicates the end of the list.
If you press [ESC] while the panel displays channel details, the panel returns to the Select Channel
display. If you press [ESC] again, the panel will return to Basic mode.
5.10.3 Selecting a Channel from an Alarm or Cut-Out List
Proceed as follows to select a channel from an Alarm List, Cut-Out List or similar:
1. For example, press [ALARM LIST].
If required, select the desired alarm system.
2. Use the [ ] and [ ] keys to step through the list until the alarm of the desired alarm channel is
displayed.
3. While the panel displays that alarm, press [DISPLAY CHANNEL].
The cursor is placed on the first alarm:
1 SELECT CHANNEL TO BE DISPLAYED:
2 M.E. LUBOIL INLET TEMP NORM
3 M.E. Sea WATER COOL INLET TEMP HIGH
Fig. E / 29 Selecting a channel for display when 3 alarms are displayed
4. Use the [ ] and [ ] keys to move the cursor which highlights the respective line.
You can only choose between the alarms currently displayed. If you wish to continue stepping
through the Alarm List, you have to press [ESC] and then open the Alarm List again.
5. Press [ENT] to select the highlighted channel.
The channel parameters of the selected alarm channel will now be displayed on the LCD, see section
5.10.4.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-63

5.10.4 Viewing Channel Parameters
When you select a channel (see sections 5.10.1 to 5.10.3), the LCD displays, e.g.:
1 *M.E. Sea WATER COOL INLET TEMP HIGH

2 45.5 DEG.C HIGH 45.5 LOW 0.0
3
4
Fig. E / 30 Selected channel showing details on an alarm
In the above example, the analog value for a channel is displayed together with the high and the low
alarm limits. Using the [ ] and [ ] keys when a channel parameter is selected you can step through
the channels defined in the system, displaying that specific parameter. This function makes it easy, e.g.,
to compare the individual cylinder temperatures of the main engine.
Using the [ ] and [ ] keys you can page through the different parameters in the channel setup. The
available parameters are shown in the following table.The table below shows the parameters of a
standard-type analog monitoring channel. The differences regarding a binary channel are explained for
the relevant parameters.
E-64 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

☞ NOTE:
Please note that depending on the type of monitoring channel, not all of the parameters will be
displayed.
Line No. Representation on the LCD
1 <simulation flag> <unackn. flag> <channel name> <status>

This line is locked and will always be displayed as first line. If the channel’s value is a simu-
lated value, then the line is preceded by the simulation flag "S". If there is an unacknowl-
edged alarm, this is indicated by an asterisk (*) as unacknowledged flag. The <channel
name> is the text description of the monitoring channel. The <status> indicates the alarm
status of the channel, e.g. NORM, ALM, NORM/CA (cut-out).
2 <channel ID> <output value> <engineering unit> <status message>

Only for analog channel types, the <output value> is displayed together with the engi-
neering unit, e.g. 112°C. The status message can be, e.g. "COMM. ERR", "NORMAL", or
"CUT-OUT", depending on the message text defined during customisation.
3 LOCAL TIME : <date> <time>

Current date and time when calling up the display. Format: YY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS
4 L1: <alarm/event trigger function> <limit val.> <alarm prio.>

Definition of the low/high alarm limit for the channel including the name of the function
used to analyse whether the channel must be set to an alarm status, the applicable limit
value, and the alarm priority in case of an alarm.
In case of a binary channel, there is no limit value.

Definition of the high high or low low alarm limit for the channel. See L1 above.
L2 does not exist for binary channels.

Definition of a third high/low limit. See L1 above.
7 L1: DELAY (SEC) ON: <seconds> OFF: <seconds>

Definition of the alarm delay. If, e.g. "1" is displayed for both ON and OFF, then an alarm
will be caused if the output value of the monitoring channel falls below the lower limit value
for more than 1 second. If it exceeds the lower limit again for more than 1 second, then
the alarm will return to NORMAL again.

Definition of the alarm delay. If, e.g. "1" is displayed for both ON and OFF, then an alarm
will be caused if the output value of the monitoring channel exceeds the upper limit value
for more than 1 second. If it falls below the upper limit again for more than 1 second, then
the alarm will return to NORMAL again.

Definition of the alarm delay. See L2 above. L3 does not exist for binary channels.
10 CUT-OUT: MAN: <ON/OFF>

Status indicating whether the channel currently is manually cut out (ON) or not (OFF). See
chapter 3.7 on page 29. An automatic Cut-Out set up during customisation would be
displayed here. See chapter 2.5 on page 14.
11 SIMULATION : OFF
Simulation status. ON = the value of the monitoring channel is simulated by manually
entered values. See chapter 3.7 on page 29. See chapter 5.10.8 on page 69.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-65

Line No. Representation on the LCD
12 TYPE : <channel type>

Channel type, e.g. ANALOG, ENUMERATED, etc. See chapter 3.2 on page 15.
13 ALARM GROUPS: <no.> - <no.> -

The IDs of the channel group(s) the monitoring channel belongs to. ’-’ means unassigned.
14 ALARM SYSTEM: <alarm system name>

The alarm system the monitoring channel belongs to, e.g. "MACH. ALM SYS" for machinery
alarm system.
15 IN DATALOG : <YES/NO>
Logging status. This indicates whether the monitoring channel is included in the Datalog.
16 MAIN INPUT : <input description an ID>

Source data of the main input of the monitoring channel, the connection terminal.
Example: "SENSOR INPUT 01/00/02/02"
In the example, the numbers indicate:

01 = ID number of the PLC
00 = analog channel (10 would be digital branch no. 1, 11 digital branch no. 2, ...)
02 = 2nd module
02 = 2nd channel
17 / 18 ADD / SUBTRACT : <channel designation> or: CONSTANT

Whether the lines are displayed depends on the concrete type of monitoring channel
configured, i.e. whether it represents an output value which is the result of an operation
like addition or subtraction of two or more channel output values.
For digital values, logical operations (AND/OR) are possible.
19 END OF DISPLAY CHANNEL

Text indicating the end of the parameter list.
Table E / 7 Available channel parameters
If you press [ESC] is while the panel displays a channel parameter the panel returns to the channel selec-
tion display. If you press [ESC] again the panel returns to Basic mode.
5.10.5 Printing Channel Parameters
When viewing the channel paramters of a monitoring channel you can print the parameters of that
channel. Proceed as follows:
1. Select a channel as described in sections 5.10.1 to 5.10.3 so that the panel is in Display Channel
mode.
2. Press the [PRINTER CONTROL] key.
3. To print the channel parameters of the specific channel, select [S1] Print channel.
The details will be printed immediately.
You can also call up the general printer menu using softkey [S2] Printer Funct. This will lead to the func-
tions described in section 5.14.
E-66 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

5.10.6 Adjusting Channel Parameters
Never adjust parameters, if you are not sure about the consequences of the
changes! For example, if you set a high temperature limit to a very high
value, this might prevent important alarms resulting in damage to equipment
and consequential accidents in operation!
☞ NOTE:
Adjusting channel parameters is not possible on DAP Accommodation. This is only possible on the
Watch Station.
Adjust Channel is a functional mode which enables the operator to make minor adjustments on the
channel parameters. It can only be used in the context of the Display Channel function on a DAP which
is serving as Watch Station and from the LOP. The [ADJUST CHANNEL] key is only active when the panel
is in the Display Channel mode and a channel parameter which can be adjusted is displayed.
Proceed as follows to adjust a channel parameter:
mode.
2. Press [ADJUST CHANNEL] and enter the required password, see also section. See chapter 5.6 on
page 55.
Both the Display Channel LED and the Adjust Channel LED start to flash.
3. Use the [ ] and [ ] keys to step through the parameters until the cursor flashes on the display:
1 M.E. EXHAUST GAS TEMP CYL. 6 NORM

2 L2: SLOW DOWN HIGH LIMIT 47 PRIO2
3 L1: DELAY (SEC) ON: 1 OFF: 1
4 L1: DELAY (SEC) ON: 1 OFF: 1
Fig. E / 31 Adjust Channel – example
4. Use the [ ] and [ ] keys to move the cursor to the desired parameter.
5. Press [ENT] to edit that parameter. The LCD displays the input mask for the selected parameter.
Example:
2
3 LIMIT 2 VALUE OLD VALUE: 475
4 NEW VALUE: 450
Fig. E / 32 Entering a new parameter value – example
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-67

6. Enter a new value.

If it is an alphanumeric value, enter the value using the numeric keys, see section 5.4.1 on page E
52. If it is a binary value (On/Off), use [ ] and [ ] keys to toggle the new value between On and
Off.
7. Press [ENT] to confirm.
You can now edit another parameter or press [ESC] to return to Display Channel or Basic mode.
The following channel parameters can be adjusted from the Duty Alarm Panel Bridge/ECR and LOP:
- High and low alarm limits (analog channels only)
- Manual alarm suppression (Cut-Out) of the channel ( see section 5.10.7 below)
- Time delays
- Simulation (see section 5.10.8 on page E 69)
☞ NOTE:The rights to adjust parameters for a channel are exclusive, i.e. they can be given to only
one panel at a time. Thus, if at a given time someone is adjusting a channel from the DAP on the
bridge, it will not be possible to adjust the same channel from a different panel at that time. The
panel will output a message accordingly. However, adjustments from a LOP for the respective FPD
are possible at all times, and any conflict will only be indicated by a buzzer sound.
5.10.7 Adjusting Channel Parameters – Manual Cut-Out
Never suppress alarms with the only purpose to stop an alarm which may
repeatedly occur. An alarm is basically meant to draw your attention to a
problem. Be sure that you are aware of the consequences and possible side-
effects of the alarm suppression!
In the NACOS Platinum it is possible to suppress (cut out) specific monitoring channels in order to
prevent undesired alarms. See chapter 3.7 on page 29. If you set the Manual Cut-Out to On, then the
alarms of the respective monitoring channel are suppressed. The channel will be listed in the Manual Cut-
Out List. See chapter 5.9.1 on page 59. If the monitoring channel was in alarm state, then it must be
acknowledged before suppressing. After suppressing it the alarm status of the monitoring channel is set
to NORM/CA otherwise it will just remain NORM. If you set the Manual Cut-Out to Off, this will result in
an alarm if the channel is in alarm state. The respective alarm is handled as any other alarm.
☞ NOTE:
It is not possible to set the Manual Cut-Out for a channel to On, if there is an unacknowledged alarm
on the respective monitoring channel. If this is the case you have to acknowledge the respective
alarm first.
☞ NOTE:
A Manual Cut-Out will overrule a simulated value. See chapter 5.10.8 on page 69.
Proceed as follows:
E-68 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

mode.
2. Press [ADJUST CHANNEL] and enter the required password. See chapter 5.6 on page 55.
3. Use the [ ] and [ ] keys to step through the parameters until the line of the Cut-Out parameters
is displayed.
4. If required, use the [ ] and [ ] keys to move the cursor to the Cut-Out parameter:

2 CUT-OUT: MAN: FF
3 SIMULATION: OFF
4 Type : ANALOG
Fig. E / 33 Adjust Channel – Manual Cut-Out
5. Press [ENT] to edit the parameter. The LCD displays the input mask for the Cut-Out parameter:

2
3 LIMIT 1 MAN. CUT-OUT OLD VALUE: OFF
4 NEW VALUE: N
Fig. E / 34 Setting the Cut-Out parameter
6. The default value is On if the current value if Off and vice versa.
You can use the [ ] and [ ] keys to toggle the new value between On and Off.
7. Press [ENT] to confirm the new value.
The Cut-Out status is set accordingly. If the monitoring channel was in alarm state (acknowledged)
when suppressing it, the status of the respective channel is set to NORM/CA.
You can now edit another parameter or press [ESC] to return to Display Channel or Basic mode.
5.10.8 Adjusting Channel Parameters – Simulation
Output values of monitoring channels can also be simulated, e.g. to force an alarm on a specific channel
for fault finding purposes.
☞ NOTE:
When you simulate an output value, this value may result in an alarm on the respective monitoring
channel. This alarm has to be treated as any other alarm.
☞ NOTE:
A Manual Cut-Out will always overrule a simulated value. Thus, you cannot generate an alarm by
simulating a value if the respective monitoring channel is suppressed by a Manual (or also by an
Automatic) Cut-Out.
Proceed as follows to simulate an output value.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-69

mode.
2. Press [ADJUST CHANNEL] and enter the required password. See chapter 5.6 on page 55.
3. Use the [ ] and [ ] keys to step through the parameters until the line of the Simulation parameter
is displayed.
4. If required, use the [ ] and [ ] keys to move the cursor to the Cut-Out parameter:

2 CUT-OUT: MAN: OFF
3 SIMULATION: FF
4 Type : ANALOG
Fig. E / 35 Adjust Channel – Manual Cut-Out
5. Press [ENT] to edit the parameter. The LCD displays the input mask for the Simulation parameter:

2
3 SIMULATION STATE OLD VALUE: OFF
4 NEW VALUE: N
Fig. E / 36 Setting the Simulation parameter
6. The default value is On if the current value is Off and vice versa.
You can use the [ ] and [ ] keys to toggle the new value between On and Off.
7. Press [ENT] to confirm the new value.
The display automatically switches to the input mask for the value which shall be simulated.

2
3 SIMULATION VALUE OLD VALUE: 0
4 NEW VALUE: 380
Fig. E / 37 Setting the Simulation value
8. Enter the desired value and press [ENT]. The LCD displays:
1 S M.E. EXHAUST GAS TEMP CYL. 6 NORM

2 CUT-OUT: MAN: OFF
3 SIMULATION: On Value: 120
4 Type : ANALOG
Fig. E / 38 Adjust Channel – Simulation is On
E-70 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

The value and simulation status are displayed in the channel parameters. Now, this monitoring channel
will have the output value you entered until you stop the simulation again. The "S" in the first line indi-
cates that the output value of the respective monitoring channel is only simulated. The simulated value
is also displayed as actual value in the channel parameters:
1 S M.E. EXHAUST GAS TEMP CYL. 6 NORM

2 14060 120 °C NORMAL
3 LOCAL TIME : 08-10-07 12:12:23
4 L1 HIGH TEMP HIGH LIMIT 450 PRIO2
Fig. E / 39 Simulated output value
The figure above shows that the 120 °C entered as simulation value are now the actual value of that
monitoring channel. In Basic mode and Alarm List "CH(s) SUPP" will be displayed in the first line to indi-
cate that an output value of a monitoring is suppressed. However, in this case, suppressed means over-
ruled by the simulated value.
When you press [ADJUST CHANNEL] again, then it is also possible that you only change the simulation
value without changing the simulation status. If the simulation value results in an alarm, then the alarm
has to be treated as any other alarm.
5.11 Watch Selection
The [WATCH] key is only available on panels which are not Duty Alarm Panels Accommodation. In the
watch selection main mode, you can select the DAP as Watch Station (WS), and you can select between
"Attended WS" and "Unattended WS". On the DAP selected as WS, the Watch LED is continuously on.
☞ NOTE:
A panel can only be selected as Watch Station if the system is customised for the Selectable Watch
Station function.
5.11.1 Select as WS
☞ NOTE:
When using the Select as WS function, then privileges of the Watch Station are always "fetched",
i.e., transferred to the panel on which the function is carried out and which is to become the Watch
Station. Hence, there is no function to deselect a panel as WS. For that purpose, a different panel
needs to be set as WS using the Select as WS function.
This function is only available on DAPs, which during the customisation are specified as being allowed to
be Watch Station. This can be looked up using the [DUTY] key. See chapter 5.12.3 on page 76. In a
standard system, only the DAP in the ECR may be allowed to be WS. In other systems, e.g., the ECR,
Bridge, and the ship’s office could be selected as WS.
Proceed as follows to make a DAP a Watch Station:
1. If not done, press [WATCH] on the DAP you wish to become the Watch Station.
2. Select the desired alarm system using the softkeys. The LCD displays:
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-71

1 WATCH STATION : <ws in ctrl >

2 <alarm system>
3 │S│ QUIT │S│SELECT │
4 │1│ │2│AS WS │
Fig. E / 40 Selecting the DAP as Watch Station
In the figure above, <ws in ctrl> is the present Watch Station, e.g. "ECR I", and <alarm system> indi-
cates the alarm system the WS is to be selected for, e.g. "MACH ALM SYS".
3. Select [S2] Select as WS.
The watch responsibility is immediately transferred to this DAP. This is indicated by the Watch LED which
is continuously on. The DAP returns to Basic mode.
5.11.2 Attended / Unattended WS
The selection of Attended / Unattended Watch Station is a communication between the bridge and the
WS. The selection can be initiated from the WS only, and normally, only when a duty officer/engineer
has been selected. As an alternative, the NACOS Platinum can be customised in a way, so that Unat-
tended WS can be selected without having to select a duty officer/engineer.
☞ NOTE:
In the following selecting the Unattended status is described. The Attended status is selected by
means of the same procedure with the exception that the status is set from Unattended to Attended.
Proceed as follows to select the Unattended WS status for the WS:

1. If not done, press [WATCH] on the WS.
2. Use the softkeys to select the relevant alarm system. The LCD displays:
1 WATCH STATION : ATTENDED

2 MACH. ALM SYS
3 │S│ │S│SELECT │
4 │1│QUIT │2│UNATT │
Fig. E / 41 Selecting between Attended/Unattended Watch Station
In the figure above, the Attended status is currently selected for the machinery alarm system.
E-72 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

3. Press [S2] Select Unatt.

The WATCH LED starts flashing, and the LCD displays the new unakcnowledged status:
1 WS STATUS CHANGE TO : UNATTENDED

2 MACH. ALM SYS UNACKN
3 │S│
4 │1│QUIT
Fig. E / 42 Status change requested
On the bridge, the buzzer sounds and the Watch LED starts flashing. Now, the bridge has to accept or
reject the requested change. In case you suddenly find out that you do not want the status change, you
can cancel the process as described under C a n c e l S t a t u s C h a n g e f r o m t h e W S ( S t o p C h a n g e ) on page
E 74.
4. Accept status change on bridge.
On the bridge, [WATCH] has to be pressed. The LCD on the bridge displays:

2 <alarm system>
3 │S│REJECT │S│ACCEPT │
4 │1│CHANGE │2│CHANGE │
Fig. E / 43 Accepting a status change (bridge)
5. To accept the change, the responsible crew member hat to press [S2] Accept Change.
The Watch LED stops flashing, the buzzer stops, and the DAP on the bridge returns to Basic mode.
The WATCH LED on the WS DAP stops flashing too, and the LCD displays that the status change has
been acknowledged:
2 ACKN
3 │S│
4 │1│QUIT
Fig. E / 44 WS status change acknowledged
If [S1] Quit or [ESC] is pressed on the WS, the DAP returns to Basic mode without making any changes.
Rejecting the Status Change on the Bridge

If on the bridge, [S1] Reject Change or [ESC] is pressed, the change request is rejected and the change
is cancelled. The buzzer of the DAP on the bridge is stopped. The Watch LED stops flashing and the DAP
returns to Basic mode. The WATCH LED on the requesting WS DAP continues to flash, and the buzzer
is started.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-73

The LCD displays:
1 ATT/UNATT WS CHANGE IN PROGRESS

2 STATUS CHANGE DENIED
3 │S│QUIT │
4 │1│CHANGE │
Fig. E / 45 Acknowledging WS status change rejection
The operator on the WS DAP must press [S1] Quit Change in order to acknowledge the rejection.
Cancel Status Change from the WS (Stop Change)

If you suddenly change your mind or otherwise do not want the requested change any more, you can
stop the request by pressing [S1] Stop Change or [ESC]. The WS DAP then returns to Basic mode and
the Watch LED stops flashing.
If the operator on the bridge has already pressed [WATCH] before you cancelled the change request,
the following is displayed on the bridge:
1 WS STATUS CHANGE TO : <ws stat>

2 CHANGE CANCELLED
3 │S│
4 │1│QUIT
Fig. E / 46 Cancelling WS status change
The Watch LED continues flashing and the buzzer sound continues (interval beep) until [S1] Quit Change
is pressed. Then the bridge DAP returns to Basic mode. If the change is stopped from the WS before
the DAP on the bridge displays the message show in Figure E / 46, the Watch LED stops flashing, the
buzzer is stopped and the DAP remains in its present mode.
5.12 Duty (not LOP)
Using the [DUTY] key you can:

- Display the present status
- Select a duty officer/engineer
- Acknowledge a duty officer/engineer selection
- Select the panel buzzer function
- Select the panel to function as a public room panel
When [DUTY] is pressed the reaction of an operator panel depends on where a panel is located. The
following figure shows the display output when you press [DUTY] on a DAP placed in a cabin.
E-74 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

1 │S│PANEL │S│SYSTEM
2 │1│SETUP │2│STATUS
Fig. E / 47 Selecting Duty (Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation)
The next figure shows the display output when you press [DUTY] on a DAP located on the bridge or in
the engine control room.
1 SELECT DUTY FUNCTION

2
3 │S│DEADMAN│S│ALM SYS│S│DUTY │S│BACKUP
4 │1│STATUS │2│STATUS │3│SELECT │4│SELECT
Fig. E / 48 Selecting Duty (DAP)
The softkey [S3] Duty Select is always present on the DAP from which a duty selection can be initiated.
On all other panels the Duty Select function will only be available when a duty selection is in progress.
On cabin panels (DAP), a duty selection of the person related to that panel is the only case which causes
the softkey to appear.
In the following sections, the sub-menus are explained which are displayed when pressing the [DUTY]
key. Please note that not all functions are available at all panels.
5.12.1 Duty – Panel Setup (Cabin Panel)
The Panel Setup sub-menu is only available on DAP Accommodation. If the panel is customised as cabin
panel, then it can be set to behave as public room panel, e.g. if a crew member wishes to be informed
about everything which would be announced on public room panels. Proceed as described in the
following example:
1. On the cabin panel, press [DUTY].
2. Press [S1] Panel Setup.
3. Use the softkeys to select the desired alarm system. The LCD displays:
1 │S│ │S│Panel
2 │1│QUIT │2│ PUBLIC
Fig. E / 49 Selecting a panel setup
4. Select [S2] to set the status to PUBLIC ROOM. Then:

All calls and alarms announced in the public rooms will be announced on that panel, and the Duty
LED operates as for a public room panel.
If you wish to return to the Cabin Panel mode, proceed as follows:
1. On the cabin panel, press [DUTY].
2. Press [S1] Panel Setup. The LCD displays:
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-75

1 │S│ │S│BUZZER │S│PANEL

2 │1│QUIT │2│ BIP │3│MODE
Fig. E / 50 Resetting a panel setup
Using [S2] you can toggle between the buzzer settings Bip and Continuous buzzer sound as long as the
panel is set to work as public room panel.
3. Select [S3] and use the softkeys to select an alarm system. The LCD displays:
1 │S│ │S│Panel
2 │1│QUIT │2│ CABIN
Fig. E / 51 Resetting a panel setup to cabin panel
4. Select [S2] to reset the panel to work as cabin panel.
5.12.2 Duty – Panel Setup (Public Room Panel)
The Panel Setup sub-menu is only available on DAP Accommodation. If the panel is customised as public
room panel, then you can only chose between Bip and Continuous buzzer sound using the Panel Setup
function. Proceed as follows:
1. On the public room panel, press [DUTY].
2. Press [S1] Panel Setup.
3. Select [S2] to set toggle from Bip to Continuous sound or vice versa.
5.12.3 Duty – System Status
To call up the duty system status, proceed as follows:

1. Press the [DUTY] key.
2. Select [S2] System Status.
3. Depending on the configuration, select [S2] ALM SYS Status, and then use the softkeys to select
the alarm system.
The LCD displays:
- Physical location of the WS
- Status of the WS (attended/unattended)
- Duty / backup person: whether selected and, if appl. who is selected
- Panel details: e.g. "Public Room", the name of the crew member in case of cabin panels indicating
the physical location of the pamel, and "Pot. WS", if the panel can be set as Watch Station for the
respective alarm system.
- Buzzer's reaction to an incoming alarm
E-76 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

The LCD output is shown in the figures below. Step through the pages using the [ ] and [ ] keys.
1 WATCH : ECR / UNATTENDED

2 DUTY : 1. ENGINEER
Fig. E / 52 Display status on Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation – example 1
1 BUZZER : ON
2 PANEL : CABIN /2ND ENG.
1 BACKUP : 3RD ENGINEER

2
5.12.4 Duty – Deadman Status
If the NACOS Platinum includes one or more deadman alarm systems, you can display the status of the
Deadman system using the [DUTY] key. Proceed as follows:
1. Press the [DUTY] key.
2. Only on DAP Accommodation: Select [S2] System Status.
3. Select [S1] Deadman Status, and then use the softkeys to select the deadman system.
The LCD displays:
1 UNFIT MACH. AL ↑↓
2 STATUS : OFF
3 BACKUP : CAPTAIN
4 RESET TIME: 6 MIN.
Fig. E / 55 Display deadman status
In the example, the deadman system of the machinery alarm system is deactivated, the reset time would
be 6 minutes. For descriptions on how to activate an reset a deadman system, refer to section 5.16 on
page E 102.
5.12.5 Duty – Duty Select
Selecting a duty officer/engineer involves communication between the Watch Station DAP and the panel
located in the requested duty officer’s/engineer’s cabin. The available options depend on the persons
configured during customisation. Proceed as described in the following example:
1. On the WS DAP, press [DUTY].
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-77

2. Press [S3] Duty Select. The LCD displays:
1 SELECT DUTY OFFICER : MACH. ALM SYS

2 SELECTED DUTY OFFICER : 3RD ENG.
3 │S│NO │S│ CHIEF │S│ 2ND ENG.
4 │1│DUTY │2│ │3│
Fig. E / 56 Selecting a duty officer/engineer
In the figure, "3RD ENG." identifies the currently selected person on duty on line 2 of the display. If you
select [S1] No Duty then the currently selected duty engineer is released from duty.
☞ NOTE:
If it is specified during customisation that Unattended WS is allowed only when a duty officer/engi-
neer is selected, the No Duty softkey is omitted when Unattended WS is selected.
3. Use the softkeys to select a new duty engineer, e.g. "2ND ENG." to select the Second Engineer.
The buzzer sounds and the Duty LED starts flashing in the following locations:
- On the WS (from where the selection was made, here no buzzer sound)
- On panels operating as public room panels
- In the cabin of the selected engineer, in the example, 2ND ENG.
This depends on configuration. Duty select without acknowledgement is basically also possible.
The WS, on which the request was initiated, displays:
1 DUTY REQUEST - SELECT : 2ND ENG.
2 MACH. ALM SYS UNACKN
3 │S│ STOP │S│ ACKN │
4 │1│SELECT │2│SELECT │
Fig. E / 57 Duty request on the WS
The figure shows the display on the DAP (WS) when a duty request is started. In Figure E / 57, "2ND
ENG." is the person who is selected as requested person to be the duty engineer. The duty request must
now be acknowledged on the panel in the requested person’s cabin. The function of softkey S2 is
described on page E 79 under "A c k n o w l e d g i n g t h e D u t y S e l e c t i o n f r o m t h e R e q u e s t i n g P a n e l ".
4. Acknowledging a Duty Request
In the requested engineer’s cabin, [DUTY] must be pressed. The LCD displays:
1 MACH. ALM SYS: DUTY OFFICER REQ

2 PRESS [ENT] TO ACCEPT
Fig. E / 58 Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation – acknowledge prompt
5. To accept the duty request, the duty engineer presses [ENT].
E-78 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

The buzzer sound in the cabin stops, and the duty engineer’s panel returns to Basic mode. The requested
engineer is now set as duty engineer, and the previous duty engineer (3rd engineer) is deselected. The
panel which initiated the request displays:
1 DUTY REQUEST - SELECT : 2ND ENG.

2 ACKN
3 │S│QUIT
4 │1│
Fig. E / 59 Duty selection acknowledged
The "ACKN" displayed in the 2nd line indicates, that the selection has been acknowledged in the selected
engineer’s cabin.
6. Press [S1] Quit or [ESC] to return to Basic mode and to stop the flashing of the Duty LED.
Display of a Duty Selection in Progress

If [DUTY], is pressed on a panel which is not involved in the ongoing duty selection the panel displays:
1 MACH. ALM SYS : DUTY OFFICER REQUEST

2 SELECTION OF : 2ND ENG.
Fig. E / 60 Duty request on a Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation not inolved
When [ESC] is pressed, the panel enters Basic mode. By pressing [STOP HORN] the buzzer can be
stopped locally.
Acknowledging the Duty Selection from the Requesting Panel

In case that the NACOS Platinum is customised accordingly, the duty selection can be acknowledged
directly from the panel which initiated the request, without acknowledgement from the selected duty
person’s cabin. The procedure is almost the same as the one involving acknowledgement from requested
person’s cabin, see above. Proceed as follows:
2. Press [S3] Duty Select.
3. Use the softkeys to select a new duty person.
If you directly acknowledge the duty person from the requesting panel, make
absolutely sure that the crew member selected as duty is informed about his/
her new role.
4. To confirm the selection press [S2] Ackn Select directly on the WS DAP you are working on.
The requested officer/engineer is selected as duty /engineer and the previous selected person is
deselected.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-79

Cancelling the Duty Selection from the Requesting Panel

If you press [S1] Stop Select or [ESC] on the WS panel which initiated the Duty Selection request, then
the duty selection procedure is cancelled. The previously selected duty officer/engineer remains on duty,
and the panel enters Basic mode.
5.12.6 Duty – Backup Select
Selecting a backup officer/engineer involves communication between the Watch Station DAP and the
panel located in the requested backup officer’s/engineer’s cabin. The available options depend on the
persons configured during customisation. Proceed as described in the following example:
2. Press [S4] Backup Select.
The LCD displays:
1 SELECT BACKUP OFFICER : MACH. ALM SYS

2 SELECTED BACKUP OFFICER: CAPTAIN
3 │S│1ST. │S│2ND.
4 │2│OFF. │3│OFF.
Fig. E / 61 Selecting a backup officer/engineer
In the figure, "CAPTAIN" identifies the currently selected backup officer.

3. Use the softkeys to select a new backup officer, e.g. [S3] 2ND. OFF. to select the Second Officer.
The the buzzer sounds and the Duty LED starts flashing in the following locations:
- On the WS (from where the selection was made, here no buzzer sound)
- On the bridge
- In the cabin of the selected officer, in the example, 2ND. OFF.
The WS, on which the request was initiated, displays:
1 BACKUP REQUEST - SELECT : 2ND. OFFICER

2 BRIDGE ALM SYS UNAKCN
3 │S│ STOP │S│ ACKN │
4 │1│SELECT │2│SELECT │
Fig. E / 62 Backup request on the WS
The figure above shows the display on the DAP (WS) when a backup request is started. "2ND OFFICER"
is the person who is selected as requested person to be the backup officer. The request must now be
acknowledged on the panel in the requested person’s cabin. The function of softkey S2 is described on
page E 81 under "A c k n o w l e d g i n g t h e B a c k u p S e l e c t i o n f r o m t h e R e q u e s t i n g P a n e l ".
4. Acknowledging a Backup Request
In the requested officers cabin, [DUTY] must be pressed.
E-80 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

1 BRIDGE ALM SYS: BACKUP OFFICER REQ

2 PRESS [ENT] TO ACCEPT
Fig. E / 63 Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation – Backup Select function
5. To accept the backup request, the slected backup officer presses [ENT].
The buzzer sound in the cabin stops, and the duty officer’s panel returns to Basic mode. The requested
officer is now set as backup officer, and the previous backup officer (Captain) is deselected.
The panel which initiated the request displays:
1 BACKUP REQUEST - SELECT : 2ND. OFFICER

2 ACKN
3 │S│
4 │1│QUIT
Fig. E / 64 Backup selection acknowledged
The "ACKN" displayed in the 2nd line indicates, that the selection has been acknowledged in the selected
officer’s cabin.
6. Press [S1] Quit or [ESC] to return to Basic mode and to stop the flashing of the Duty LED.
Display of a Backup Selection in Progress

If [DUTY], is pressed on a panel which is not involved in the ongoing duty selection the panel displays:
1 BRIDGE ALM SYS : BACKUP OFFICER REQUEST

2 SELECTION OF : 2ND. OFFICER
Fig. E / 65 Backup request on a Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation not involved
When [ESC] is pressed, the panel enters Basic mode. By pressing [STOP HORN] the buzzer can be
stopped locally.
Acknowledging the Backup Selection from the Requesting Panel

In case that the NACOS Platinum is customised accordingly, the backup selection can be acknowledged
directly from the panel which initiated the request, without acknowledgement from the selected officer’s/
engineer’s cabin. The procedure is almost the same as the one involving acknowledgement from
requested officer’s/engineer’s cabin, see above. Proceed as follows:
2. Press [S4] Backup Select.
3. Use the softkeys to select a new backup officer.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-81

If you directly acknowledge the backup from the requesting panel, make
absolutely sure that the crew member selected as backup is informed about
his/her new role.
4. To confirm the selection press [S2] Ackn Select directly on the WS DAP you are working on.
The requested officer is selected as backup officer and the previous selected officer is deselected.
Cancelling the Backup Selection from the Requesting Panel

If you press [S1] Stop Select or [ESC] on the WS panel which initiated the Backup Selection request,
then the backup selection procedure is cancelled. The previously selected backup officer/engineer
remains on duty, and the panel enters Basic mode.
5.13 Assist Call (DAP, LOP)
Using the Assist Call function, you can call a specific crew member for help. The Assist Call can be initi-
ated from specified DAP panels and from the Local Operator Panels (if included in the FPDs). The avail-
able options depend on the system configuration and on the current location. For example, when you
are in the chief engineer’s cabin, there will be no option to call the chief engineer for assistance.
5.13.1 Calling One Crew Member for Assistance
In the following example, the 2nd Engineer is called for assistance from the ECR. Proceed as follows:
1. Press [ASSIST CALL] on the DAP or on the LOP. The LCD displays:
1 SELECT CREW MEMBER TO CALL:

2
3 │S│CALL │S│ALL EN-│S│ALL OF-│S│MORE
4 │1│TO ALL│2│GINEERS│3│FICERS │4│
Fig. E / 66 Calling for assistance
2. Use the softkeys to select the desired crew member or group. In our example, select [S4] More and
then [S2] 2ND. ENG.
This triggers the assist call. The Assist Call LED starts flashing and the buzzer sounds in the following
locations:
- On the bridge
- On all panels operating as Watch Station
- In the cabin of the called crew member
E-82 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

- On the panel from where the call is initiated

(here no buzzer sound)
You can stop the buzzers locally by pressing [STOP HORN] on the respective panel. The panel which
initiated the call displays:
1 ASSIST CALL :2ND ENGINEER UNACKN

2 CALL TO :ECR I
3
4 PRESS [ENT] TO STOP ASSIST CALL
Fig. E / 67 Assist Call initiated from a DAP
3. Acknowledging an Assist Call

The assist call must be acknowledged on the cabin panel of the person who is called.
If [ASSIST CALL] is pressed in cabin of the called person. The LCD on that panel displays:
1 TO LOCATION : ECR I
2 PRESS [ENT] TO ACKNOWLDEGE ASSIST CALL
Fig. E / 68 Assist Call display in the cabin of the called person
The cabin panel of the called crew member displays the name of the panel from which the assist
call was initiated. In our example, this is the ECR I panel. Thus, the called person will immediately
know where to go.
4. The called crew member acknowledges the call by pressing [ENT].
The buzzer will stop, and the panel in the cabin will return to Basic mode. The calling status UNACKN
on the panel from which the call was initiated, will switch to ACKN to inform the calling person that
the request has been noted:
1 ASSIST CALL :2ND ENGINEER ACKN

2 CALL TO :ECR I
3
4 PRESS [ENT] TO STOP ASSIST CALL
Fig. E / 69 Acknowledged Assist Call on a DAP
5. On the calling panel, press [ENT] to stop the call.

Now, also the Assist Call LEDs will stop flashing on all respective panels.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-83

5.13.2 Calling a Group of Persons for Assistance
Proceed as follows to call a group of crew members or all operators for assistance:
1. Press [ASSIST CALL].
2. Use the softkeys to trigger a call to a group or a call to all crew members:
[S1]: Call To All. This is output on all panels.
[S2]: All Engineers. This is output on all public panels and on the bridge panel.
[S3]: All Officers. This is output on all public panels and on the bridge panel.
3. To stop the individual buzzers, [STOP HORN] must be pressed on the respective panel. The
person(s) called have to walk to the calling location:
1 ASSIST CALL : ALL ENGINEERS

Fig. E / 70 Assist call in progress
4. As soon as help has arrived, or in case help is no longer required, the call can be acknowledged on
the calling panel. Press [ENT] to stop the call. This will switch off all Assist Call LEDs and buzzers,
and the respective panels will return to Basic mode.
5.13.3 Display of an Assist Call in Progress
If after an assist call was triggered, [ASSIST CALL] is pressed on a panel which is not directly involved,
e.g. in a public room, the panel displays:
1 ASSIST CALL : 2ND ENGINEER

If the Assist Call was a group call (All Engineers, All Officers, or Call to All) then the panels not directly
involved will display:
1 ASSIST CALL IN PROGRESS

2 PRESS [ESC] TO RETURN TO BASIC MODE
When pressing [ESC], the panel returns to Basic mode. Pressing [STOP HORN] will stop the buzzer
locally.
E-84 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

5.13.4 Stopping the Assist Call from the Calling Panel
The assist call procedure can be stopped at any time by pressing [ENT] on the panel which initiated the
call.
5.14 Printing (WS DAP)
Using the [PRINTER CONTROL] key you can operate and control the printers which are connected to the
NACOS Platinum System. The NACOS Platinum works with up to 2 printers: alarm/event printer
connected to a PLC (master) and command printer connected to the PC MFD on the bridge. The
command printer cannot be operated using a DAP. On the DAP located at the WS and on the DAP Bridge
you can use the Printer Control function to print different reports. You can also specify on which of the
printers the data shall be printed, adjust automatic log intervals, etc.
☞ NOTE:
Automatic printouts can be scheduled in the printer configuration,
see section 5.14.3 on page E 88.
Depending on the configuration, for example, the following lists can be printed:
- Datalog
- Manoeuvre datalog
- Alarm lists
- Cut-Out Lists
- Failure lists
- Alarm/Event Log
- Select Monitoring Channel
- Changed Monitoring Channels
- Alarm System Report
- Report status
The formats of the lists are described separately.
To access the Printer Control functions, press the [PRINTER CONTROL] key. The available printer control
commands are displayed. The following figures display the available options which are described in the
subsequent sections:
1 SELECT PRINTER FUNCTION:

2
3 │S│ ALARM │S│ADD. │S│PRINTER │S│ MORE
4 │1│ LIST │2│LIST │3│CONFIG │4│
Fig. E / 73 Printer control – display 1
☞ NOTE:
"PRINTER CONFIG" is only available at the WS and requires password level 2 or higher.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-85

5.14.1 Alarm List
In order to be able to print the Alarm List report, a printer must be selected for that list, i.e. printing
must not be disabled, see P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n – [ S 3 ] C h o o s e P r i n t e r on page E 91. Otherwise, an
error message is output. Proceed as follows to print the Alarm List report:
1. If not done, press the [PRINTER CONTROL] key.
2. Select [S1] Alarm List.
3. Use the softkeys to select the desired alarm system and to print the respective list immediately.
The contents of the Alarm List report are described separately.
5.14.2 Add. List – Printing Cut-Out and Specific Alarm Lists
Using the Add. List option in the printer functions, you can print various lists such as
- Suppressed:
Simulated channels
Manual cut-outs
Automatic cut-outs
- Sensor and device fail lists
- Specific Alarm Lists:
Alarms of priority 1
Alarms of Priority 1 and 2
All Alarms
When you press [PRINTER CONTROL] and then [S2] Add. List, you will be prompted to select the desired
type of list you wish to print:
1 Select List Type:

2
3 │S│SUP- │S│FAIL │S│ALARMS
4 │1│PRESSED│2│ │3│
Fig. E / 74 Selecting a cut-out list
The available options are explained in the following sub-sections.
Add. List – [S1] Suppressed

In order to be able to print one of the Add. Lists, a printer must be selected for the Add. Lists, i.e.
printing must not be disabled, see P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n – [ S 3 ] C h o o s e P r i n t e r on page E 91. Otherwise,
an error message is output. Proceed as follows to print a Cut-Out List or a list of simulated channels:
2. Select [S2] Add. List.
3. Select [S1] Suppressed.
E-86 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

[S1] Simulated
This will print a report of all channels the output value of which is currently suppressed by replacing
it by a simulated value.
[S2] Manual Cutout
This will print a report of all channels which have been manually suppressed (cut out).
[S3] Auto-Cutout
This will print a report of all channels which have been automatically suppressed (cut out), e.g. by
a specific event.
5. Use the softkeys to select the desired alarm system. The report will then be printed immediately.
The contents of the reports are described separately.
Add. List – [S2] Fail

an error message is output. Proceed as follows to print a Device Fail list or Sensor Fail list:
3. Select [S2] Fail.
5. [S1] Sensor Fail
This will print a report of all channels which do not have an output value because of a defective
sensor which provides a sensor failure alarm.
6. [S2] Device Fail
This will print a report of all channels which do not have an output value because the assigned input
interface has failed.
7.
The contents of the reports are described separately.
Add. List – [S3] Alarms

an error message is output. Using this printing function, you can print specifically selected alarms.
Proceed as follows:
3. Select [S3] Alarms.
[S1] Prio 1 Alarmsl
This will print a report of all priority 1 alarms for the selected alarm system.
[S2] Prio 1+2 Alarms
For the selected alarm system, this will print a report of all alarms which have alarm priority 1 or 2.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-87

[S3] All
This will print all alarms for the selected alarm system. This is the same list as the Alarm List report,
see section 5.8.
The contents of alarm reports are described separately.
5.14.3 Printer Config
Proceed as follows to adjust the printer configuration:

☞ NOTE:
"PRINTER CONFIG" is only available at the WS and requires the respective password.
See also section see 5.6 on page E 55.
While you are working in Printer Configuration mode, the LED of the [PRINTER CONTROL] key will
flash.

2. Select [S3] Printer Config
You will be prompted to enter the level 2 password.
3. Enter the required password and, if required, press [ENT].
The LED of the [PRINTER CONTROL] key starts to flash, and the following is displayed:
1 SELECT CONFIGURATION:
2
3 │S│DATALOG│S│AUTO │S│CHOOSE │S│CANCEL
4 │1│FORMATS│2│PRINT │3│PRINTER│4│PRINT
Fig. E / 75 Printer configuration menu
If you do not press any key for a while, for safety reasons the panel will automatically return to the
Printer Control main mode ("Select Printer Function"). You might have to repeat the steps described
above.
The following options are available and they are described in the subsequent sections:
- [S1] Datalog Formats
Here you can select the degree of detail for the Datalog report: compressed/extended.
- [S2] Auto Print
Here you can set the Auto Print timers which control automatic printing of selected reports.
- [S3] Choose Printer
For each of the available reports you can select the printer and you can select whether to print the
reports at all.
- [S4] Cancel Print
Using this function, you can stop the data transfer to the printer and thus cancel a printing process.
Printer Config – [S1] Datalog Format

You can toggle between compressed and extended format of the Datalog and the Manoeuvre Datalog
reports. Accordingly, more or less details will be output in the report. Proceed as follows:
E-88 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)


3. Enter the level 2 password and, if required, press [ENT].
4. Select [S1] Datalog Format.
5. Use the softkeys to select the desired alarm system. The LCD displays:
1 PRINTER CONTROL : MACH. ALM SYS

2 EXTENDED
3 │S│COMPRES│S│ EXTEN
4 │1│SED │2│ DED
Fig. E / 76 Selecting the datalog format
In the figure, the selected alarm system and the currently selected Datalog format are displayed.
6. Use the softkeys to select the desired option.
The Datalog will then be printed accordingly.
The two formats are described separately.
Printer Configuration – [S2] Auto Print

Using Auto Print timers, the NACOS Platinum can be configured to print the available lists at fixed times
and intervals:
- Alarm List
- Add. List
Suppressed (Simulated, Manual and Automatic Cut-Out List)
Fail (Sensor Fail, Device Fail)
Alarms (Prio 1, Prio 1+2, All)
- Datalog
For each of the above lists, start time and print interval can be adjusted. Proceed as described in the
following example:
4. Select [S2] Auto Print.
The LCD displays:
1 SELECT AUTOMATIC PRINTING:
2
3 │S│ ALARM │S│ADD. │S│ DATALOG │S│MORE
4 │1│ LIST │2│LIST │3│ │4│
Fig. E / 77 Adjusting the Auto Print timers
5. For example, select [S2] Add. List
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-89

6. Use the softkeys to select the desired option, e.g. [S3] Alarms.
7. Use the softkeys to select the desired list, e.g. [S1] Prio 1 Alarms.
8. Use the softkeys to select the desired alarm system. The LCD displays the Auto Print options:
1 SELECT AUTO-TIMES: MACH. ALM SYS

2 19:00 06:00 PRINTER No. 1
3 │S│ START │S│ INTER-
4 │1│ TIME │2│ VAL │
Fig. E / 78 Example of selection between adjustment of the start time or interval
In the example, the Prio 1 Alarms list is printed at 7 p.m. on Printer No. 1, and printing is repeated
at 6 hours intervals.
9. Select [S1] Start Time.
10. Enter the start time in the format HH:MM.
See also section 5.4.2 E n t e r i n g T i m e V a l u e s on page E 53.
Example:
1 ENTER NEW START TIME: MACH. ALM SYS

2
3 NEW VALUE: 18:00
4 OLD VALUE: 19:00
Fig. E / 79 Setting the Auto Print start time
11. Press [ENT] to confirm the new start time.

If you press [ESC], you return to the previous screen without making any changes.
12. Select [S2] Interval.
13. Enter the start time in the format HH:MM.
See also section 5.4.2 E n t e r i n g T i m e V a l u e s on page E 53.
Example:
1 ENTER NEW INTERVAL: MACH. ALM SYS
2
3 NEW VALUE: 12:00
4 OLD VALUE: 06:00
Fig. E / 80 Setting the Auto Print interval
In the example, the print interval is set to 12 hours, i.e. the respective list is printed twice per day.
14. Press [ENT] to confirm the new interval.
If you press [ESC], you return to the previous screen without making any changes.
☞ NOTE:
If you set the print interval to "0", no auto print is carried out.
E-90 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

15. Press [ENT] to confirm the new print interval.

If you press [ESC], you will return to the previous screen without making any changes.
Printer Configuration – [S3] Choose Printer

Using the Printer Select function you can select whether the individual available reports shall be printed
at all, and which printer shall be used to print the reports. This applies to all available reports.
Proceed as follows to adjust the printing options for individual reports:
2. Select [S3] Printer Config.
4. Select [S3] Choose Printer. The LCD displays:
1 SELECT DESTINATION PRINTOUT:

2
3 │S│ALARM │S│ADD. │S│DATALOG│S│MORE
4 │1│LIST │2│LIST │3│ │4│
Fig. E / 81 Printer Select function – display 1
5. Use the softkeys to select the desired report.

If appl., press [S4] More to view more options.
For example, select the [S2] Add. List.
6. Select [S3] Alarms, then [S1] Prio 1 Alarms, and use the softkeys to select the desired alarm system.
The LCD displays:
1 SELECT PRINTER: MACH. ALM SYS
2 PRT. DISABLED
3 │S│PRINT │S│PRINTER│S│PRINTER
4 │1│DISABLE│2│No. 1 │3│No. 2
Fig. E / 82 Selecting the printer for a report
The example above shows that printing is currently disabled for the Prio 1 Alarm list of the machinery
system ("PRT. DISABLED"). When a printer is assigned to a report, then, e.g. "PRINTER No. 1" will be
displayed in line 2.
7. Use softkey [S2] or [S3] to select the desired printer for the respective list.
☞ NOTE:
If you select [S1] Print disable, then the selected report will not be printed at all.
☞ NOTE:
The softkey [S3] Printer 2 will not be available if there is only one printer connected to the PLC.
The respective report will now be printed on the selected printer. Please note that in case of the Cut-
Out Lists, the above selection applies to both Auto Cut-Out and Manual Cut-Out Lists, so that the lists
will be printed on the same printer.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-91

Printer Configuration – [S4] Cancel Print

Using this function, you can stop the data transfer to the printer and thus cancel a printing process.
Proceed as follows:
4. Select [S4] Cancel Print.
5. Use the softkeys to select the printer to be stopped.
The running printing process stops immediately, the panel returns to Basic mode.
5.14.4 Print Manoeuvre Datalog
The Manoeuvre Datalog is a linewise printout of specific main engine(s) data. It contains the current
main parameters (except the alarm/event date) of specifically configured monitoring channels used to
monitor the main engine(s). It is defined by configuration and must not be suppressed by the operator.
The printout is to be backed up like the engine log.
Proceed as follows to print the Datalog:
2. Select [S4] More.
3. Select [S1] Manoeuv Datalog.
4. If appl., use the softkeys to select the desired alarm system.
The Datalog is printed immediately.
The selection between an extended and a compressed datalog is a sub-menu to Printer Config, see
section 5.14.3. The contents resemble the Datalog contents (analog).
5.14.5 Select Channel – Printing
This functionality is not implemented in the current release.
5.14.6 Print Datalog
Proceed as follows to print the Datalog:

2. Select [S4] More.
3. Select [S3] Datalog.
The Datalog is printed immediately.
The contents of the Datalog report are described separately. The selection between an extended and a
compressed datalog is a sub-menu to Printer Config, see section 5.14.3.
E-92 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

5.14.7 Changed Mon. Channel – Printing
The Changed Monitoring Channel list details the channel parameters of monitoring channels. However,
only the parameters of channels are included the parameters of which have been changed. Proceed as
follows to print the Changed Monitoring Channels list:
2. Press [S4] More twice.
3. Select [S1] Changed Mon. CH.
The list is printed immediately.
The contents of the list are described separately.
5.14.8 Alm. Sys Report
The Alarm System Report contains a summary of the channel parameters for all monitoring channels of
the selected alarm system. Proceed as follows to print the report:
3. Select [S2] ALM. SYS REPORT.
The report is printed immediately.
The contents of the report are described separately.
5.14.9 Report Status
The Report Status option will print a configuration status report which details the configuration of the
printouts, e.g. the printer used for a report, as well as autoprint settings. See section 5.14.3 on page E
88. Proceed as follows to print the report:
3. Select [S3] Report Status.
The report is printed immediately.
The contents of the report are described separately.
5.15 Maintenance (DAP, LOP)
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-93

Using the [MAINTENANCE] key, you can adjust various basic settings in the NACOS Platinum alarm and
monitoring system. The menu of the Maintenance mode provides various options depending on the type
of panel. Using the softkey [S4] More you can page through the available options which are described
in the subsequent sections. The following functions are provided:
Softkey Name and Function Available from
[S1] Display Time All panels
(display time & date: local time and UTC)
[S2] Version Control All panels
(display information on the software used in the NACOS Plat-
inum)
[S3] Set Time WS
(set time & date: local time and UTC)
[S3] on non-WS panels Lamp Test Non-WS panels
(test to verify that all LEDs and the buzzer are functioning)
[S4] More WS
[S1] Lamp Test All panels
(test to verify that all LEDs and the buzzer are functioning)
[S2] Select UTC/LT WS
(toggle between UTC and local time)
[S3] Commiss Mode, only available to SAM Electronics* WS
(enter Commissioning mode)
[S4] More WS
[S1] Change PW LEV1 WS
(change password - level 1)
[S4] More WS
[S2] System PW LEV WS
(to suppress password prompts)
[S3] Watch Dog TST, only available to SAM Electronics* WS
[S4] More WS
[S1] Store Setup, store settings immediately WS
Table E / 8 Maintenance functions
☞ *) NOTE:
Please note that functions marked as "only available to SAM Electronics" are for special users only,
i.e. the SAM Electronics personnel for setup and customisation of the system. See chapter 2.5 on
page 14. These functions are not explained in these operating instructions.
E-94 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

5.15.1 Display Time
Proceed as follows to display the current system time and date:

1. Press the [MAINTENANCE] key.
2. Select [S1] Display Time.
The local time and date as well as the UTC are displayed in the format HH:MM:SS and YY.MM.DD. The
display is updated at regular intervals because the system time continuously progresses in the back-
ground.
5.15.2 Version Control
Proceed as follows to display information on the software and database used in the NACOS Platinum:
1. Press the [MAINTENANCE] key.
2. Select [S2] Version Control. The version information are displayed. Example:
1 VIEW PROGRAM VERSION / DATABASE VERSION

2 VERSION/TYPE NO. : 1.0.05.05
3 DATABASE DATE/SEQ. : 20081028/86
4 SHIP NAME : FRANCESCA
Fig. E / 83 Version information display
Line 2 displays the information on the software and line 3 displays the information on the database used.
You may have to have these information at hand, e.g. when calling SAM Electronics service for help.
5.15.3 Set Time (UTC)
The system time can be displayed in Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) or local time (LT). The system
time is displayed, e.g. in the channel parameters of a monitoring channel selected in the Alarm List or
in the headers of reports. To ensure that the NACOS Platinum functions properly and correctly, both
times must be set correctly. In most standard configurations, the NACOS Platinum will receive date and
time from the master clock. If the NACOS Platinum is not connected to a master clock, then date and
time must be manually entered and checked at regular intervals. For example, the LT needs to be
adjusted, when the ship enters a new time zone.
☞ NOTE:
Depending on the system configuration, the NACOS Platinum may be connected to an optional
master clock supplying a master clock signal to the NACOS Platinum which will overrule any manual
adjustments described in the following. Any manually adjusted time or date will be automatically
replaced by the time of the master clock.
To set the UTC, proceed as follows:

1. If not done, press the [MAINTENANCE] key.
2. Press [S3] Set Time.
3. Enter the required password and, if required, press [ENT].
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-95

4. Press key [S1] Set UTC.

5. Press key [S1] Set Time. The LCD displays:
1 SET UTC TIME

2
3 ENTER NEW TIME : 19:12:00
4 CURRENT TIME : 19:12:00 <HH:MM:SS>
Fig. E / 84 Setting the UTC time
☞ NOTE:
The time displayed in the bottom line is the time at which you called up the display. This time will
be updated every 5 seconds.
If the NACOS Platinum is connected to a master clock, an incorrect time entered will be corrected
automatically after a short time.
6. Under ENTER NEW TIME enter the UTC time in the format HH:MM:SS and press [ENT] to confirm
the time entered. See also section 5.4.2 on page E 53.
The display returns to the previous screen.
If you press [ESC] you will return to the previous screen without making any changes.
7. If required, press [S2] Set Date and enter the correct date:
1 SET UTC DATE

2
3 ENTER NEW DATE : 18-10-01
4 CURRENT DATE : 08-10-01 <YY-MM-DD>
Fig. E / 85 Setting the date
8. Enter the date in the format YY-MM-DD and press [ENT] to confirm your input.
See also section 5.4.2 on page E 53.
If required, press [ESC] repeatedly to return to Basic mode.
5.15.4 Setting Local Time and Date (LT)
The system time can be displayed in Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) or local time (LT). The system
time is displayed, e.g. in the channel parameters of a monitoring channel selected in the Alarm List or
in the headers of reports. To ensure that the NACOS Platinum functions properly and correctly, both
times must be set correctly.
The Local Time is calculated based on the UTC time (see 5.15.3 above) plus or minus an offset of one
or more hours. The maximum offset is +/- 12 hours. The date is calculated accordingly. As soon as the
ship enters a new time zone, the LT must be set to the correct time. You can change the time by fixed
values (see A d j u s t T i m e i n F i x e d S t e p s below) or enter the new time directly. To set the LT directly,
proceed as follows:
E-96 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)


2. Press [S3] Set Time, and, if required, enter the password.
3. Press key [S2] Set LT.
1 SET LOCAL TIME

2
3 │S│SET │S│ZONE │S│TIME │S│TIME
4 │1│ TIME │2│ADJUST │3│ +60 │4│ -60
Fig. E / 86 Setting time and date
4. Press key [S1] Set Time.

5. Enter the new time in the format HH:MM. Use the [+/-] to set whether the offset shall be positive
or negative. Example:
1 SET LOCAL TIME

2 UTC TIME : 13:03:45
3 NEW OFFSET : -01:00
4 CURRENT OFFSET : 00:00 <+-HH:MM>
Fig. E / 87 Setting the time
In the example above, an offset of -1 hour is set.

6. Press [ENT] to confirm the changes.
To view the current LT, press [MAINTENANCE] and then [S1] Display Time.
Adjust Time in Fixed Steps

When the ship enters a new time zone, you can adjust the time in fixed steps. Proceed as follows:
2. Press [S3] Set Time, and enter the password.
1 SET LOCAL TIME

2
4 │1│ TIME │2│ADJUST │3│ +60 │4│ -60
Fig. E / 88 Local Time menu
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-97

4. Use [S3] Time +60 or [S4] Time –60 to change the time in steps 60 minutes until you reach the
correct local time. For example, if you select [S3], the LCD displays:
1 CHANGE LOCAL TIME

2 INCREASE THE PRESENT TIME 60 MIN.
3 │S│ │S│
4 │1│ QUIT │2│ACCEPT
Fig. E / 89 Adding 60 minutes to the Local Time
5. Select [S2] to confirm the change Press [ENT] to confirm the time entered.
If you press [ESC] or [S1] you will return to the previous screen without making any changes.
In case you need to change the time by more than one hour, just repeat the above steps.
Zone Adjust
If required, you can adjust the fixed steps by which the time can be adjusted using softkeys [S3] and
[S4] (see A d j u s t T i m e i n F i x e d S t e p s above). Proceed as described in the following example:
2. Press [S3] Set Time, and enter the password.
1 SET LOCAL TIME

2
4 │1│ TIME │2│ADJUST │3│ +0 │4│ -0
Fig. E / 90 Zone Adjust
In the example above, the fixed steps for time zone adjustment are set to 0. We assume that you
wish to set the steps to +/- 60 minutes.
4. Press [S2] Zone Adjust Time.
The LCD displays:
1 ENTER NEW TIME ZONE ADJUST VALUE:

2
3 ENTER NEW VALUE: 60
4 CURRENT VALUE : 0 MINUTES
Fig. E / 91 Changing the zone adjust value
5. Enter 60 minutes as new value and press [ENT] to confirm the input.
E-98 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

The display returns to the previous screen and the changes are immediately visible:
1 SET LOCAL TIME
2
4 │1│ TIME │2│ADJUST │3│ +60 │4│ -60
Fig. E / 92 Local Time menu
Using the softkeys [S3] and [S4] you can now adjust the Local Time in steps of +60 or -60 minutes, see
A d j u s t T i m e i n F i x e d S t e p s above.
5.15.5 Lamp Test
All panels provide the Lamp Test function which serves to verify that all LEDs, indications and the buzzer
are operable. Proceed as follows:
2. Select [S1] Lamp Test.
All LEDs, and visual indications except the Fire Alarm lamp light up, the Fault indication flashes, and
the buzzer sounds. The LCD displays the following message:
*** LAMP TEST -- PRESS [ESC] TO STOP ***
3. Check to see if all elements function properly.

If this is not the case a fuse or the defective panel must be replaced.
4. Press [ESC] to stop the test.
5. Again, press [ESC].
The panel returns to basic mode.
5.15.6 Select UTC/LT – Toggling Between UTC/LT Display
For all displays and logs it can be commonly defined whether time values displayed or printed shall be
based on UTC or LT. Proceed as follows to toggle between UTC and LT:
2. Press [S4] More, then [S2] Select UTC/LT, and enter the password. In the following example it is
assumed that LT is currently selected. Thus, only the UTC option is available:
1 SET LOCAL TIME

2
3 │S│ │S│SELECT
4 │1│ QUIT │2│UTC
Fig. E / 93 Toggling between UTC and LT
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-99

3. Press [S2] Select UTC.

The time on panels and in logs will then be displayed and printed accordingly.
If you press [ESC] or [S1] the display returns to the previous screen without making any changes.
5.15.7 Commiss Mode
This function is reserved for special users, i.e. the SAM Electronics personnel for setup and customisation
of the system. See chapter 2.5 on page 14. The function is therefore not explained in these operating
instructions.
5.15.8 Changing Passwords
☞ NOTE:
This section explains how to change a password. As an example, the level 1 password is changed.
Changing passwords of other levels works according to the same principle.
Please note that changing passwords requires the respective privileges. To change a password of a
certain level, you will be prompted to enter the password of the next higher level. For example, you
have to enter the level 2 password, or higher, to change the level 1 password. However, level 4
requires level 4. See also section 5.6 on page E 55.
To change a password proceed as described in the following example:

3. Select [S1] Change PW LEV 1. The LCD displays:
1
2
3 ENTER PASSWORD - LEVEL 2: _
4
Fig. E / 94 Level 2 password prompt
4. Enter the level 2 password.

After entering a valid password the LCD displays:
1 CHANGE PASSWORD
2 ENTER NEW PASSWORD - LEVEL 1:
3 CONFIRM PASSWORD - LEVEL 1:
4
Fig. E / 95 Changing the level 1 password
5. Enter the new password.
E-100 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

The following password conventions apply:

- For passwords, only the numeric keys (0-9) can be used. All other keys are invalid for passwords,
and pressing them will cause the buzzer to sound.
- A password consists of 6 digits max. and at least one digit, i.e. only one key must be pressed. Other-
wise, an error message will be displayed after pressing [ENT].
- If a password consist of 6 digits, then the last key pressed for the password will confirm the input.
[ENT] is not pressed after input.
- If [ENT] is pressed when less than 6 keys have been entered (but more than one), the password
only consists of the the keys entered so far.
- If more than 6 digits are entered, then only the first 6 are used. Any further key pressed will be
ignored.
6. If required, press [ENT] to confirm the password you entered.
7. Under "Confirm Password", repeat the password. If required, press [ENT].
In case you made any mistake when entering or repeating the password, then an error message will be
displayed. Then you just have to repeat the steps 5 and 6 above.
5.15.9 System PW LEV
Never use this function to deactivate password prompts permanently. Be sure

to deactivate it as soon as you have finished your work!
☞ NOTE:
This function requires the level 4 password
If, in a longer working process, you have to use functions repeatedly which are password-protected, you
can deactivate the password prompts using the System PW Lev function. Proceed as follows:
2. Press [S4] More three times.
3. Press [S2] System PW LEV.
4. Enter the level 4 password.
5. Select [S1] On to activate the System Password Level mode.
The Maintenance LED will flash until you switch off this mode again.
Now, if you use functions, which would normally require a password, e.g. in Maintenance mode, the
password prompt will now be skipped and the respective functional modes will be activated imme-
diately when you select them.
Be sure to deactivate the System Password Level mode when you have finished your work. To deactivate
the System Password Level mode, proceed as described above and select [S2] Off in the last step. The
panel will return to normal operation, i.e. there will be password prompts again.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-101

5.15.10 Watch Dog TST
This function is reserved for special users, i.e. the SAM Electronics personnel for setup and customisation
of the system. See chapter 2.5 on page 14. The function is therefore not explained in these operating
instructions.
5.15.11 Store Setup
This function serves to store settings you made, e.g. adjusted channel parameters, in a non-volatile
memory immediately. The settings are also automatically stored at regular intervals. However, this may
take some time. So, if you want to be sure, settings are saved immediately, proceed as follows:
2. Press [S4] More four times.
3. Press [S1] Store Setup.
All settings are stored immediately. The panel returns to Basic mode.
5.16 Deadman (DAP, LOP)
The NACOS Platinum can handle up to four independent deadman alarms which are based on a timer
function. Definition and naming of the deadman systems is part of the customisation process. See
chapter 2.5 on page 14. The deadman timer has to be reset regularly in order to prevent an alarm. The
setup and operation of the deadman system is described in the following sections.
5.16.1 Setting up the Deadman System(s)
☞ NOTE:
Setting up a deadman system requires at least password level 3, see section see 5.6 on page E 55.
Each of the individual deadman alarm systems can be set up as follows:

- The system can be set ON/OFF automatically controlled by a binary input. For example, the navi-
gator deadman system is set ON when one of the steering gear pumps is running.
- The operator can select between ON and OFF.
For each deadman alarm system a DAP is customised to control the deadman status selection. The
following options are available:
- Selection of deadman status from a unique DAP
- Selection of deadman status from the WS.
- Selection of deadman status using external hardware (switch)
To change the status of the deadman system proceed as described in the following example:
E-102 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

1. Press the [DEADMAN] key.

If the deadman system is already active, press the [DEADMAN] key twice within 5 seconds.
That means, first press the key to reset the deadman timer, then press the key again to enter the
deadman function. If the panel is allowed to control the status of one more of the deadman systems
the LCD displays:
1 SELECT DEADMAN SYSTEM

2
3 │S│UNFIT │S│UNFIT
4 │1│MACH. │2│BRIDGE
Fig. E / 96 Selecting a deadman alarm system
2. Using the softkeys, select the desired deadman system.

The deadman system status is displayed.
☞ NOTE:
The display in the figure above is omitted if the panel can change the status for one of the systems
only.
1 DEADMAN SYSTEM UNFIT BRIDGE

2 OFF 2 MIN.
3 │S│START │S│ADJUST
4 │2│ │4│TIME
Fig. E / 97 Deadman systems status
In the figure, "UNFIT BRIDGE" identifies the selected deadman alarm system, "OFF" indicates the present
status, and "2 MIN." is the current setting of the deadman timer, i.e., if the deadman system is activated,
then the operator has to press a key at least every 2 minutes.
3. If you wish to change the time interval of the deadman timer, select [S4] Adjust Time, and enter
the required password, see also see 5.6 on page E 55. The LCD displays:

2 OFF
3 DEADMAN TIME : 2 MIN.
4 ENTER NEW VALUE : [1-5] 2
Fig. E / 98 Deadman time prompt
4. Enter the desired value using numeric keys 1 to 5.

In the example, the value may range between 1 and 5 minutes. However, this depends on the
system configuration of the NACOS Platinum.
In case you attempt to enter an invalid value, the value will be rejected and the buzzer will sound.
5. Press [ENT] to confirm the value. The display returns to the previous screen.
If you press [ESC] you will return to the previos screen without making any changes.
6. Select [S2] Start to activate the deadman system and thus to start the deadman timer.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-103


The new status will be displayed accordingly.
The Deadman LED on the panel which can be used to reset the deadman timer is constantly on. To
prevent an alarm the responsible operator must press any key on that panel at the required regular
intervals set as described above. If the operator fails to press a key in time, the deadman alarm
sequence starts, see section 5.16.4 on page E 105.
The deadman system is now set up.
5.16.2 Displaying the Deadman System Status on a Resetting Panel
Each DAP or LOP can be customised to reset the deadman timer in one of the four available deadman
alarm systems. If the deadman function is active, this is indicated by the Deadman LED on your panel,
which is constantly on. This means that the panel acts as deadman switch which has to be operated
regularly. In order to prevent an alarm you have to press a key at regular intervals. Proceed as follows
to check the deadman system status and to find out the deadman time:
1. On a panel which can reset a deadman alarm timer, press the [DEADMAN] key twice within 5
seconds. That means, first press the key to reset the deadman timer, then press the key again to
enter the deadman function. Example:
1 DEADMAN SYSTEM UNFIT MACH.

2 ON 5 MIN.
Fig. E / 99 Deadman system status on a two-line LCD of a LOP
2. Check the deadman system status and the deadman time.

In the example, the deadman system of the machinery area is On. The deadman time is set to 5
min. so you have to press any key on the panel every 5 minutes the latest to prevent an alarm.
5.16.3 Resetting the Deadman Timer
To reset the deadman timer in order to prevent a deadman alarm you can carry out one of the following
actions:
- Press any button on the relevant DAP.
- Move the trackball of the MFD on the Watch Station (if available)
- Press an external switch (if customised)
Proceed as follows to reset the deadman timer and check the deadman status on a DAP:
1. Check whether the Deadman LED is on.
If it is off, then the deadman function is deactivated.
2. If the Deadman LED is on, press the [DEADMAN] key twice twice within 5 seconds.
That means, first press the key to reset the deadman timer, then press the key again to enter the
deadman function.
3. If the panel is allowed to control the status of one more of the deadman systems, use the softkeys
to select the desired deadman system. The LCD displays the current status of the deadman system.
E-104 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

Example:

2 ON 2 MIN.
3 │S│STOP │S│ADJUST
4 │1│ │4│TIME
Fig. E / 100 Deadman systems status – On

5. Before the deadman time elapses, press any key on your panel to reset the deadman timer.
6. Repeat pressing a key at the required intervals.
☞ NOTE:
If a MFD is connected, you can also reset the deadman timer by moving the MFD trackball.
5.16.4 Deadman Alarm Sequence
If the deadman function is set up and activated (see section 5.16.1 above), this is indicated by the
Deadman LED being constantly on. If you forget to reset the deadman timer within the defined deadman
time by pressing a key, the following alarm sequence is started:
1. The Deadman LED flashes.
Now, you have 1 more minute (depending on configuration) to reset the timer by pressing the
[DEADMAN] key or any other key.
2. After elapse of the additional minute, the deadman warning is output:
The Deadman LED of the resetting panel continues flashing and the buzzer sounds
(intermittent beep).
3. If you fail to reset the deadman timer despite the Deadman Warning, then after a defined time, e.g.
5 minutes, a Deadman Alarm is triggered which is output like an All Operators Call.
4. The Deadman Alarm is output via an alarm channel and must be acknowledged like an All Operators
Call at the Watch Station, see also section 5.17.3 on page E 108.
5.17 Processing Alarms
This section describes the required steps to be taken in case of the following important alarm scenarios:
- Alarm in case of Attended WS status
- Duty Call
- All Engineers Call
- Deadman Alarm
- Fire Alarm
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-105

Please note that the descriptions of the alarm processing measures only cover
the steps in the context of the NACOS Platinum. For information regarding
remedial action in the systems which triggered an alarm, please refer to the
documentation of the respective systems. Remedial action regarding NACOS
Platinum system alarms is described separately.
☞ NOTE:
In the descriptions, it is assumed that you use the Duty Alarm Panels (DAP) to handle the alarms.
However, using the MFDs (PC-stations), the operations will only slightly vary. Also it is assumed that
you are already familiar with the basic concepts and functions in the NACOS Platinum. So if in doubt,
for safety’s sake please refer to the relevant sections in these operating instructions.
5.17.1 Alarm Processing – Attended WS
Scenario: An alarm occurs in one of the alarm systems, e.g. a machinery alarm. The responsible Watch
Station (ECR) has the Attended WS status and operates in Basic mode. On the WS panel, the Alarm LED
is on and the buzzer sounds. Depending on the configuration, additional signals like rotating lights or
external horns are on.
Proceed as follows to process the alarm described above:
1. Stop Horn
On the Watch Station, press the [STOP HORN] key.
The buzzer and, if appl., external horns are stopped.
See sections 5.3.5 [ S T O P H O R N ] & [ A L A R M A C K N ] K e y s on page E 50 and
3.6 A l a r m A n n o u n c e m e n t a n d A c k n o w l e d g e m e n t on page E 27.
If you are unsure about what panel is the current Watch Station, press the [DUTY] key, select [S2]
System Status, and then select the relevant alarm system, on your panel. The current Watch Station
for the selected alarm system is displayed on the LCD.
2. What has happened?
Check the message output on the LCD in order to get a first impression of what has happened.
See section 5.7 B a s i c M o d e ( D A P , L O P ) on page E 56.
3. Acknowledge alarm
Press [ALARM ACKN] to acknowledge the alarm.
If you are working in one of the functional modes (not Alarm List), then you will first have to switch
to Basic mode or to the Alarm List to be able to acknowledge the alarm. Press [ESC] to enter Basic
mode, or you have to press [ALARM LIST] to call up the Alarm List directly.
If you fail to acknowledge the alarm this will result in an All Operators Call after a specified time.
4. View details
In the Alarm List, press [DISPLAY CHANNEL], use the [ ] and [ ] keys to select the respective
alarm, and press [ENT] to view the channel parameters, e.g. including actual values of the respec-
tive monitoring channel.
See section 5.10 D i s p l a y C h a n n e l ( D A P , L O P ) on page E 61, and in particular,
section 5.10.3 S e l e c t i n g a C h a n n e l f r o m a n A l a r m o r C u t - O u t L i s t on page E 63. NACOS Platinum
system alarms are described separately.
E-106 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

5. Manual Cut-Out?
If required, e.g. to prevent alarms while replacing a defective sensor, manually cut out the moni-
toring channel or simulate the output value of the monitoring channel by adjusting the channel
parameters of that channel accordingly.
See sections 3.7 O v e r r u l i n g O u t p u t – S u p p r e s s i n g A l a r m s / S i m u l a t i n g O u t p u t V a l u e s on page E 29,
and 5.10.6 A d j u s t i n g C h a n n e l P a r a m e t e r s on page E 67.
6. Remedy
Take remedial actions to correct the cause of the alarm.
The remedial action to be taken depends on the system affected by the fault or value which caused
the alarm. Please refer to the relevant documentation of that system.
If the alarm is due to a system alarm. please refer to the separate descriptions for information
regarding remedial action.
7. Verify result
View the Alarm List, and if required the channel parameters of the relevant monitoring channel to
see if the monitoring channel and its values have returned to a normal state.
See section 5.8 A l a r m L i s t ( D A P , L O P ) on page E 57.
8. If required, deactivate all simulations or cut-outs.
5.17.2 Duty Call
Scenario: An alarm occurs in one of the alarm systems, e.g. a machinery alarm. On the WS panel, the
Alarm LED is on and the buzzer sounds. Depending on the configuration, additional signals like rotating
lights or external horns are on. Let’s assume you are the engineer who is selected as duty engineer and
that you are in your cabin. Because you are set as duty engineer, the alarm is indicated not only on the
Watch Station, but also on your cabin panel, and on the DAPs which are configured as public room
panels. The Duty LED flashes. This is referred to as duty call.
The required steps are similar as for the scenario described in section 5.17.1. However, in this case, a
walk to the Watch Station is required. Proceed as follows to process the alarm described above:
1. Stop Duty Call
On the Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation (cabin panel), press the [STOP HORN] key.
The buzzers on the cabin panel and on the public panels are stopped. However, the buzzer on the
Watch Station location (ECR) will continue to sound until [STOP HORN] is pressed on the Duty Alarm
Panel of the WS.
If you are unsure about what panel is the current Watch Station, press the [DUTY] key, select [S2]
System Status, and then select the relevant alarm system, on your cabin panel. The current Watch
Station for the selected alarm system is displayed on the LCD.
If you are unsure what alarm system the current alarm belongs to, check the channel parameters
of the respective monitoring channel.
In Basic mode, just press [DISPLAY CHANNEL]. If more than 1 alarm is present, use the [ ] and
[ ] keys to select one of the alarms and press [ENT]. Then the parameters of the monitoring
channel are displayed for the respective alarm. If required, use [ ] and [ ] keys to display the
relevant alarm system. Alternatively, you can call up the Alarm List and identify the alarm according
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-107

to number of alarms in the individual alarm system and the asterisks in the lists displayed. However,
in many cases the alarm message will already provide information to identify that the alarm origi-
nates from, e.g. the machinery alarm system.
3. Move to WS
Walk to the Watch Station in the ECR. In a standard configuration, you will have 5 minutes to
acknowledge the alarm on the Watch Station. Otherwise an All Operators Call will be triggered.
4. Process the alarm
When you arrive at the Watch Station, press the [STOP HORN] key, and process the alarm as
described in section 5.17.1 on page E 106.
5.17.3 Processing an All Operators Call
Scenario: An alarm occurs in one of the alarm systems, e.g. a machinery alarm. On the WS panel, the
Alarm LED is on and the buzzer sounds. Depending on the configuration, additional signals like rotating
lights or external horns are on. The engineer, who is selected as duty engineer, is in his cabin. The alarm
is indicated on the cabin panel and on the DAPs which are configured as public room panels. The Duty
LED flashes. The person on duty does not respond to the alarm, and an All Operators Call is triggered.
This is output on
- All Duty Alarm Panels Accommodation operating as public room panels
- All Duty Alarm Panels Accommodation in the cabins
- Watch Station
- LOPs
For this scenario we assume you are an engineer who is in a public room. When an All Operators Call is
initiated, then the buzzers can only be stopped locally. The buzzers are deactivated when all alarms have
been acknowledged from the Watch Station. Proceed as follows:
1. Stop Horn locally
To stop the buzer in the public room, press the [STOP HORN] key on the public panel.
If you are unsure what panel is the current Watch Station, press the [DUTY] key, select [S2] System
Status, and then select the relevant alarm system, on your cabin panel. The current Watch Station
for the selected alarm system is displayed on the LCD.
If you are unsure about what alarm system the current alarm belongs to, check the channel param-
eters of the respective monitoring channel.
In Basic mode, just press [DISPLAY CHANNEL]. If more than 1 alarm is present, use the [ ] and
[ ] keys to select one of the alarms and press [ENT]. Then the parameters of the monitoring
channel are displayed for the respective alarm. If required, use [ ] and [ ] keys to display the
relevant alarm system. Alternatively, you can call up the Alarm List and identify the alarm according
to number of alarms in the individual alarm system and the asterisks in the lists displayed. However,
in many cases the alarm message will already provide information to identify that the alarm origi-
nates from, e.g. the machinery alarm system.
3. Move to WS
Walk to the Watch Station e.g. in the ECR.
E-108 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

4. Acknowledge alarms
On the Watch Station, press [ALARM ACKN] for all alarms to acknowledge the alarms.
This is the only way to stop the buzzers and horns.
If you are working in one of the functional modes (not Alarm List), then you will have to press [ESC]
to enter Basic mode, or you have to press [ALARM LIST] to call up the Alarm List directly.
5. View details
In the Alarm List, press [DISPLAY CHANNEL], use the [ ] and [ ] keys to select the respective
alarm, and press [ENT] to view the channel parameters, e.g. including actual values of the respec-
tive monitoring channel.
See section 5.10 D i s p l a y C h a n n e l ( D A P , L O P ) on page E 61, and in particular,
section 5.10.3 S e l e c t i n g a C h a n n e l f r o m a n A l a r m o r C u t - O u t L i s t on page E 63, and regarding
NACOS Platinum system alarms, please refer to the relevant separate descriptions.
6. Manual Cut-Out?
See sections 3.7 O v e r r u l i n g O u t p u t – S u p p r e s s i n g A l a r m s / S i m u l a t i n g O u t p u t V a l u e s on page E 29,
and 5.10.6 A d j u s t i n g C h a n n e l P a r a m e t e r s on page E 67.
7. Remedy
If the alarm is due to a system alarm. please refer to the separate desciptions for information
regarding remedial action.
8. Verify result
View the Alarm List, and if required the channel parameters of the relevant monitoring channel to
see if the monitoring channel and its values have returned to a normal state.
See section 5.8 A l a r m L i s t ( D A P , L O P ) on page E 57.
5.17.4 Processing a Deadman Alarm
See section 5.16.4 D e a d m a n A l a r m S e q u e n c e on page E 105.
5.17.5 Processing a Fire Alarm
If a fire is detected, a fire alarm will be triggered in the fire alarm system. This alarm will be also indi-
cated by the Fire LED on the panels. However, the Fire LED does not belong to the NACOS Platinum but
to the fire alarm system which is a physically separate system. In case of a fire alarm, proceed as
described in the relevant documentation, e.g. a fire alarm plan, or the relevant emergency procedures.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-109

E-110 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

NACOS Platinum E-6 Operating Instructions for the MFDs (PC-Stations)
6 Operating Instructions for the MFDs (PC-Stations)
This chapter describes the procedures for machinery when operating the PC-based MFD used in the
MCS Platinum. For a description of the NACOS Platinum MFDs, refer to the General part of the NACOS
Platinum operating instructions.
☞ NOTE:
The screen layouts of the MCS Platinum application in many cases depend on the configuration and
customisation of the NACOS Platinum, see section on customisation in the General Part of the
NACOS Platinum operating instructions. Hence, the screens shown in this chapter must be consid-
ered examples, and they may in some cases slightly differ from the actual screen layouts.
☞ NOTE:
Basically, MFDs are an optional feature in the context of the MCS Platinum. Except the graphical
representations and additional control features, the functions can also be carried out using the DAP
panels, see chapter 5. If in doubt, use the Watch Station panel for alarm handling and monitoring.
We highly recommend that you read or at least have a glance at the first introductory chapters of the
MCS Platinum part of the operating instructions before starting work. See chapter E - 1 on page 3. Also,
the information provided in the General part of the NACOS Platinum operating instructions must be read
and understood.
This chapter is structured as follows:
- Sections 6.1 and 6.2 give general information on the MCS Platinum.
- The sections starting from 6.3 on page E-117 describe the individual functions and displays of the
MFD.
- The general alarm handling procedures for MCS are described in section 5.17 on page E-105.
The descriptions are based on panel operation, but the respective acknowledgement functions and
displays are also found on the MFDs. A specific example of alarm handling using the MFD is
described at the end of this chapter. See chapter E - 6.11 on page 130.
For an overview of all Platinum alarms and their handling please see chapter "ALARMS" on page
V-1.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-111

E MACHINERY_workstation_op.fm /
E-6 Operating Instructions for the MFDs (PC-Stations) NACOS Platinum
The image below shows an example of the MCS Platinum screen.
Fig. E / 101 MCS Platinum screen
The screen structure is similar to the other NACOS Platinum applications. The main screen is divided into:
- Application area with a single or multiple frames and
- Sidebar with
- Title bar
See General Part of the NACOS Platinum operating instructions.
- Permanent area
See chapter E - 6.2.1 on page 115.
- Non-permanent area
In the application area of the example above a mimic diagram and the Alarm List are displayed. The
sidebar of the MCS Platinum screen cannot be hidden. The individual areas of the screen are described
in the following sections.
E-112 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

6.1 Operating the MCS Platinum
Except from disturbing your colleagues, you can cause no harm in any way by trying out the
MCS Platinum functions and GUI features on the MFD using the different input devices, as long as you
do not attempt to make changes which require entering a password.
Be careful whenever a password is required. Do not enter a password and

change, e.g. parameters or properties, or simulate a value, without being sure
about the effects that this will have.
NOTE:
In most cases, there are various options to call up a function or display, e.g.
the menu bar, a context menu (called up by means of a right-click), a function
key, or an icon.
The main functions of the MCS Platinum are handled in various different windows and frames, e.g. Alarm
List, etc. For operation of the GUI, different input devices can be used:
- Trackball
- PC keyboard or console keyboard, if provided
- Onscreen keyboard and onscreen function keys, if configured
☞ NOTE:
Please note that not all functions and operations may be possible using the keyboard.
6.1.1 Keyboard Operation
Function Keys
Depending on the customisation of the system, the function keys on the PC keyboard are specifically
assigned to functional modes. When you press one of the function keys [F1] to [F12], then the MFD will
display the respective contents in the application area or trigger the respective function, regardless of
the current menu or functional mode displayed when you press the key.
Function key features are sometimes also implemented in form of onscreen function keys as an optional
feature, e.g. if the MFD is not equipped with a PC keyboard but with trackball only.
[ENTER] ( )
The [ENTER] key is the general accept key. For example, the [ENTER] key is used to confirm a numeric
value entered. In lists, e.g. of monitoring channels, the [ENTER] key will also open detail information to
a selected list item.
[ESC]
The [ESC] key is a general quit key. When you press [ESC], the current operation is cancelled without
any error message. This means that, e.g., if you press [ESC], while you are prompted for input in a
dialogue, the prompt is cancelled and the MCS Platinum continues to operate in the current mode.
If the [ESC] key is pressed while the MCS Platinum displays a list, properties, a pop-up dialogue, etc.,
then the respective window which is displayed in the foreground will be closed. If multiple windows are
open, you may have to press [ESC] repeatedly until you reach the main page again.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-113

[NUM LOCK] and Numeric Key Pad

[NUM LOCK] must be active to enter numeric values, else use the numeric keys in the top row, above
QWERTY(UIOP) row or press NUM LOCK and then use numeric key pad. Otherwise, the numeric key pad
serves as screen navigation, see labels on PC keyboard and the table below.
Screen Navigation Keys
The following table explains the functions of the navigation keys, which are used to step and page
through lists which might span over multiple screen pages.
Keys Description
[PAGE UP] Use [PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN] to page through
[PAGE DOWN] lists like the Alarm List or to step through other dis-
plays.
[HOME] Use [HOME] and [END] to jump to the top (oldest

[END] alarms) of a screen page, or to the bottom (newest
alarms) of the page respectively.
Arrow keys: Depending on the MCS Platinum’s mode of operation

[ ] [ ] use the keys [ ] and [ ] to step through the displayed
[ ] [ ] information line-by-line. Use the [ ] and [ ] keys, e.g.
to move the cursor in a text field.
Use the [TAB] key to move from one field to another in

[TAB] ( ) a dialogue, use [SHIFT]+[TAB] to move in reverse
direction. Use [CTRL]+[TAB] to switch between
tabbed panels of a window.
6.2 MCS Platinum GUI
As already introduced the layout of the MCS Platinum is similar as in the other NACOS Platinum applica-
tions, see General part of the NACOS Platinum operating instructions. The GUI is divided into the
standard title bar, the application area, as well as a permanent area and a non-permanent area in the
sidebar.
E-114 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

6.2.1 MCS Platinum Permanent Area
Compared to the RADAR and ECDIS applications, the permanent area of MCS Platinum is very small.
Because MCS Platinum systems are customised to individual ships, the information presented in the
permanent area will differ slightly in each installation.
Fig. E / 102 MCS Platinum permanent area of the sidebar
In the permanent area, the following is displayed:

- For each available alarm system an Alarm System group with information on number of alarms, disa-
bled monitoring channels, as well as information on watch station, duty and backup duty
See chapter E - 6.3 on page 117.
- Deadman system (if installed)
- Alarms expander with Alarm List
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-115

6.2.2 MCS Platinum Non-Permanent Area
The non-permanent area provides information on various systems and sub-systems of the ship which do
not have to be permanently displayed:
Fig. E / 103 MCS Platinum non-permanent area of the sidebar
In the example above, the MCS Platinum non-permanent area contains the following expanders:
- Measurements expander
- Display expander with access to mimics, lists, trend curves and maintenance
See chapter E - 6.7 on page E-123 for information on mimics.
See chapter E - 6.8 on page E-127 for information on lists.
See chapter E - 6.9 on page E-128 for information on trend curves.
See chapter E - 5.15 on page E-93 for information on maintenance.
E-116 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

6.3 Alarm System Status Field Group
For each available alarm system a status field group is provided in the permanent area of the sidebar
which shows the number of alarms and various information which are specific to that alarm system. The
figures below show examples:
Fig. E / 104 One (left) or two (right) alarm systems in alarm system groups
The figure above shows the MCS Platinum with one (left) or two (right) alarm systems represented in
Alarm System groups. The following is displayed for each alarm system:
- Alarms
The total number of alarms present on the alarm system.
- Disabled
The total number of channels the output of which is disabled by Man. / Auto Suppressions and Simu-
lations.
- Watch Location
The location of the DAP panel defined as Watch Station.
- Watch Status
Whether the Watch Station is Attended or Unattended.
- Duty Officer
The duty officer/engineer currently selected for the Watch Station in case of Unattended status.
- Backup
The backup duty of the duty officer/engineer.
See chapter E - 6.3.3 on page 119
Some of the above details can be adjusted using the menus. This is described in the following sections.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-117

6.3.1 Selecting an MFD as Watch Station 1)
If the system is configured accordingly, the Watch Station of the alarm system can be transferred to
another MFD. After the transfer, all display and operation functions, which are only available at the Watch
Station, will no longer be available at the previous station but only at the MFD, which now is the Watch
Station. During the transfer the privileges of the Watch Station are always "fetched", i.e., the transfer is
always carried out at the MFD which is to become the Watch Station. Proceed as follows:
1. The current watch station is indicated in the watch station status field as shown below. Here it is
Swbd. Room 1 (Switchboard Room 1). Select the Watch Station for which the MFD you are
currently working on shall become the Watch Station.
A prompt for confirmation is displayed.
2. Confirm the selection.
If the system is configured in a way that the MFD cannot be set as Watch Station of the selected alarm
system, the message "Location cannot be selected" is displayed. Confirm by selecting OK.
6.3.2 Setting the Attended/Unattended Status of the Watch Station 2)
If the operator wishes to leave the Watch Stationwhile the ship is sailing, the operator must set the
Watch Station to Unattended and the bridge needs to acknowledge the request. The prerequisite for
setting the station to Unattended also is that a Duty or Backup Duty is defined. To set the Watch Station
to Unattended proceed as follows:
1. At the MFD of the Watch Station, open the Status menu in the alarm system’s status field group.
2. Select UNATTENDED and click on OK. Another window is displayed showing the status Waiting for
ack.... This means that the request to set the Watch Station to Unattended has been output on the
alarm panel of the bridge alarm station. If instead, a window with the message "Not allowed" is
displayed, this means that the MFD you are working on is not the Watch Station, and can thus not
be set to Unattended.
3. When the transfer was approved by the bridge, the item in the Alarm System Status window
changes and in the additional window opened, the message "Change accepted" is displayed.
4. Close the additional window by selecting Close.
1) This function is currently only available from the operator panels!

E-118 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

Now, all alarms, which are (still) acoustically output at the Watch Station, will also be output on the
bridge alarm panel by means of an acoustic signal. To reset the Watch Station to Attended, proceed as
described above but select ATTENDED instead of UNATTENDED.
6.3.3 Defining Duty and Backup 1)
If this is configured, then for each alarm system an officer/engineer can be defined as duty and/or
backup duty. As the bridge is always staffed, the configuration in many cases does not provide for a duty
of the bridge alarm system but only a backup duty. By means of the Duty/Backup setting, it is defined
in what cabins the alarms are output with an acoustic signal. See chapter E - 3.9 on page 31. Depending
on the configuration, the respective settings are made at the respective Watch Station of the alarm
system. Proceed as follows:
1. At the MFD of the Watch Station, open the Duty Officer menu in the alarm system’s status field
group.
2. Select the desired person, or select NONE to indicate that no duty shall be defined. In that case,
the acoustic signals in public rooms are deactivated.
4. If required, open the Backup menu in the alarm system’s status field group.
5. Select the desired person, or select NONE to indicate that no backup shall be defined. In that case,
the acoustic signals in public rooms are deactivated.
The settings are stored and applied accordingly. If the system is configured in a manner that this setting
cannot be made at this alarm station, the message "Not allowed" is displayed. Confirm the message by
selecting OK.
6.3.4 Cabin Assignment – Adjusting Selection Options for Duty and Backup 2)
If configured, you can define the crew members to be listed in the menu opened in the sequence above
and who can thus be selected as Duty or Backup Duty. This way, it is possible to assign the Duty or
Backup Duty option to a specific cabin, e.g. if a cabin is used by different persons over the time. Proceed
as follows:
1. Click on the Cabin Assignment button in the Alarm System Status window in the top right corner of
the table, and enter the required the password. The Cabin Assignment window is opened. The crew
members (cabins) listed in the table which is opened have been entered in that table by configura-
tion.
2. Double-click on the status you wish to change.
The Select Cabin Status is displayed.
3. Under New, adjust the status by clicking on the Yes or No statuses.
Yes means: can be selected as Duty and Backup Duty.
4. Click on OK to complete the adjustment and to store the changes.

ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-119

6.4 Deadman Reset
If the MFD is connected to the respective location and if a deadman timer has been set up, you can
reset the deadman timer by simply moving the trackball. The information of the deadman system are
displayed in the permanent area below the alarm system information. The following figure shows an
example:
Fig. E / 105 Example of a MCS Platinum with two deadman systems
For each deadman system one line is provided including:

- Name of the alarm system, e.g. ECR
- Status: Off / Running / Timing Out (flashing)
- Set button
Click this button to start and stop the respective deadman system.
The deadman system can also be set up and operated using the Duty Alarm Panels. See chapter E - 5.16
on page 102.
6.5 Alarms Expander and Alarms List
You can view alarms either in the Alarms expander in the permanent area of the sidebar or in the Alarm
List which you can display in the applications area. To view alarms, open the Alarms expander or open
the Display expander and select the desired Alarm list on the Lists tab. See chapter E - 6.8 on page
127.
E-120 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

Fig. E / 106 Alarms expander
The Alarms expander provides the Stop Horn and Acknowledge buttons which are used to acknowl-
edge Alarms. See chapter E - 6.10 on page 129. The latest alarm message of an unacknowledged alarm
is displayed below the two buttons in the permanent alarm line which is always visible, i.e. also if the
expander is collapsed. If customised accordingly, the list of alarms of the individual alarm systems config-
ured are arranged on separate tabbed panels in the content area of the Alarms expander. In the bottom
line, the total number of alarms in the list and the entries currently displayed are shown. In the example,
the list contains 9 entries of which entries 1 to 9 are displayed.
The icons and priority ranking of alarms correspond to the overall NACOS Platinum alarm concept. For
an overview of all Platinum alarms and their handling please see chapter "ALARMS" on page V-1.
To open the Alarm List, select the desired list on the Lists tab of the Display expander. Alternatively,
you can view the alarms in the Alarms expander. The Alarm List is displayed in the application area:
Fig. E / 107 Alarm List
The Alarm List shows all present and unacknowledged alarms. Unacknowledged Alarms are indicated by
a flashing entry in the first column. The alarms are chronologically listed in the Alarm List. The newest
alarms are placed at the bottom of the list.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-121

☞ NOTE:
To view the channel parameters of one of the monitoring channels in the list, right-click on an entry
in the list and select properties from the pop-up menu..
The list includes the following columns:

- (State)
Icon indicating the type and state of the alarm. The alarm icons are explained in the General part
of the NACOS Platinum operating instructions. A flashing icon indicates that the alarm is unacknowl-
edged.
- ID
The channel ID. See chapter E - 3.4 on page 24.
- Name
Text describing the monitoring channel.
- Message
The actual error message of the alarm.
- Value
In case of analog values, the output value of the monitoring channel.
- Date
The date at which the error occurred.
- Time
The time at which the error occurred.
At the bottom, the record counter shows the total number of alarm messages and in brackets the number
of alarm messages currently displayed. Above the Alarm List window you will find a toolbar. The buttons
are explained in the following table:
Button Explanation
Acknowledge All Acknowledge all present alarms.
This button will acknowledge all unacknowledged alarms in the list. The same
prerequisites apply as for the acknowledge button for one alarm, see above.
Menu to select a different list. When you click on one of the icons, you can select
one of the lists from the available categories. The list is then displayed instead of
the currently displayed list.
Table E / 9 Alarm List toolbar
6.6 Measurements Expander
The Measurements expander can be used to focus on the output values of specific monitoring channels
which, e.g. require particular attention or which have a tendency to cause problems in a certain situation.
To add a new line to the list, click + Add Line. A new empty line is then added to the list.
E-122 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

If you select a monitoring channel by clicking on the arrow on the right of a new or also of an existing
line in the list then a list of monitoring channels is displayed from which you can select the desired
channel:
Fig. E / 108 Measurements expander: select channel
When you select one of the entries in the list, the channel name and the output value will be then
displayed in the list. Example:
Fig. E / 109 Measurements expander
In the figure above, the current water depth is displayed which can be easily monitored. To remove an
item from the list, click on the x-icon on the right of the item in the list.
6.7 Mimics (Display Expander)
☞ NOTE:
The available mimic diagrams highly depend on the customisation of your system, particularly
regarding the use of IGSS features, see section on customisation in the General part of the NACOS
Platinum operating instructions. The examples in this chapter serve to illustrate the basic principles
of mimic diagrams. For details regarding the features customised for your system, refer to the
delivery documents.
Mimic diagrams are schematic graphical representations of the ship’s systems and sub-systems, for
example the propulsion system, the electrical power plant, or even a representation of the actual NACOS
Platinum. The mimic diagrams provide an effective and intuitive means to monitor and control such
systems.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-123

To open a mimic diagram in the application area of the MCS Platinum application, open the Display
expander and click on the Mimics tab. The mimics browser is displayed which is based on standard
controls that can be found in Windows Explorer:
Fig. E / 110 The mimics browser
Depending on the customisation, the mimic folder structures are arranged on tabbed panels e.g.:
- Mimics: displays all mimics in the system
- FPDs: mimic diagrams of the FPDs in the system
- Recent: a list of mimics recently viewed
Locate the desired mimic diagram in the folder structure. If you select the Show Images option in the
Views menu then icons of the mimics are displayed giving an impression of the mimics which could be
of help when looking for a specific mimic diagram. If the Show Text option is selected, then only a list
of mimic names is displayed which might give a better overview of a longer list.
The Back and Forward buttons ( ) have the same function as in Windows Explorer. You
can use them to switch the view back and forward again, i.e. the function remembers your last naviga-
tion steps.
E-124 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

The following figure shows an example of a simple mimic diagram:
Fig. E / 111 Mimic diagram with a right-click on a pump
The figure shows various devices, output values of monitoring channels, as well as schematic illustrations
of pumps and valves. Alarm states are indicated by the color code and flashing values or icons in the
same way as described for the Alarm List. For an overview of all Platinum alarms and their handling
please see chapter "ALARMS" on page V-1.
The values and many of the icons displayed are click-sensitive. Click-sensitive elements may be indicated
by a roll-over effect which you can see when you move the trackball pointer over the screen elements.
Click-sensitive means that you can open different menus when you right-click or left-click on the respec-
tive element. In some cases, a left-click will open another mimic diagram.
For example, when you left-click on a pump icon, the menu called up could contain the following items
for remote control:
- The ID of the pump (read only)
The ID can be used to look up the respective Device Properties and, if appl, the Channel Properties
of the related monitoring channel.
- Reset
To reset the pump.
- Stop
To stop the pump manually.
- Start
To start the pump manually.
When you left-click on a value, there may be items for
- HA (High Alarm) indicating the respective limit,
- LA (Low Alarm) indicating the respective limit, and
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-125

- PV indicating the current process value.

- SP (Set Point), to set a reference value.
When you click on, e.g. a density value, then you can use the item PV to set the actual value if the
density has changed. When you right-click on the pump icon, the menu called up will contain the
following items to display additional information:
- The ID of the pump (read only)
The ID can be used to look up the respective Device Properties and, if appl., the Channel Properties
of the related monitoring channel.
- Acknowledge
To acknowledge an alarm in the related system component, here a pump.
- Properties
To call up properties. In a separate graphical representation you will be informed about the prop-
erties of the pump. See chapter E - 6.7.1 on page 126.
- Related Mimics
To display the pump in related mimic diagrams.
- Trend
To display trend curves for the pump. See chapter E - 6.9 on page 128.
- History
To call up historical data of the pump.
- Notes
To view notes manually entered for that pump.
6.7.1 Properties
When you right-click on the pump icon and select Properties in the context menu, details on that pump
are displayed in the application area in graphical form:
Fig. E / 112 Properties of a pump
The overview picture shows the input and output signals, the possible commands and the parameters of
the respective device in graphical form.
E-126 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

6.8 Lists (Display Expander)
This function corresponds to the [ADD. LISTS] button of the panels. You can select various lists for each
of the alarm systems. Different list types are available in the MCS Platinum which display alarms,
suppressed alarms, and failures. To display one of the available lists, open the Display expander on the
sidebar, click on the Lists tab, and then select one of the lists from the folder structure. When you click
on one of the list names, the list is then displayed in a frame of the application area:
Fig. E / 113 Alarm List in the application area of the MCS Platinum
The figure above shows the All tab of Alarm List, i.e. all present alarms of all priorities are displayed. To
switch the view to a different list, you can select a different list in the menu shown above the tabs, or
you can click on one of the tabs to switch to a different list of the same category. In the example above,
you could click on the Priority 1 tab to display alarms of priority 1 only. To switch to the Device Fail
List, you can open the Lists menu and then select the desired list in the menu.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-127

Depending on the configuration, the following lists are available for each alarm system:
List Description
Alarm Lists – All Same list as the Alarm List in the Alarm expander. See
chapter E - 6.5 on page 120.
Alarm Lists – Priority 1 This is very much the same as the Alarm List. However,
the alarms output are limited to alarms of priority 1.
Alarm Lists – Priority 1+2 This is very much the same as the Alarm List. However,
the alarms output are limited to alarms of priority 1
and 2.
Failure Lists – Device Fail List of alarm messages related to defective equipment
in the NACOS Platinum.
Failure Lists – Sensor Fail List of alarm messages related to defective sensors in
the NACOS Platinum.
Disabled Lists – Manual Set List of all channels the output value of which is
currently simulated, See chapter E - 3.7 on page 29.
Suppressed Lists – Auto Disabled List of all automatic cut-outs, i.e. channels with auto-
matically suppressed alarms. See chapter E - 3.7.1 on
page 29.
Suppressed Lists – Manual Disabled List of all manual cut-outs, i.e. channels with manually
suppressed alarms. See chapter E - 3.7.1 on page 29.
Table E / 10 Available list types for each alarm system
☞ NOTE:
In principle, the lists work in the same way as the Alarm List of the Alarm expander. See chapter E
- 6.5 on page 120.
6.9 Trend (Display Expander)
Trend curves are graphical representations of monitoring channels. To display a trend curve, right-click
on an icon in a mimic diagram, and select Trend from the context menu which is displayed.
Fig. E / 114 Trend
E-128 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

The trend curve is the graphical representation of a channel’s history. For analog channels, the channel’s
analog value is displayed. The time interval between two samples of the analog value in the trend curve
is individually specified in customisation for each analog channel. See chapter E - 2.5 on page 14.
In the graphical representation, the sequence of the output values is shown over the past time. The
display is updated at regular intervals which can be defined by the operator, see below. The last twenty
updates are displayed.
When opening the display, at first the value zero is displayed. The chronological sequence of values will
not be displayed until the first change in output value. Below the graphical representation, the data of
the monitoring channels are displayed, the output values of which are represented. Alarm status and
channel description are output, in case of analog values also the output value and the respective unit.
The different curves displayed are distinguished by means of different colors. In this case, the colors do
not have the usual meaning as for alarm status values. They shall only serve to illustrate the relation
between the channel name and data, and the graphical representation.
In case of binary channel the value 1 on the Y-axis corresponds to the value ON and 0 corresponds to
the value OFF (unless "off" generates an alarm, then vice versa). If several status values are displayed,
then only the changes can be evaluated. In case of the horizontal lines the color does not always corre-
spond to the data fields.
6.10 Alarm Acknowledgement
Never stop the horn and acknowledge alarms with the only aim to silence the
system. Ensure that alarms are handled properly and thoroughly.
The general alarm handling is as described in the more general section. See chapter E - 3.6 on page 27.
The specific alarm handling procedures when using the panels is described in the chapter dealing with
the panel operation. See See chapter E - 5.17 on page 105. On the MFD to stop buzzers and horns, click
on the Stop Horn button in the Alarms expander or at the top of the Alarm List, or press [F11] on the
keyboard. However, if the alarm is an All Operators Call, then all alarms have to be acknowledged on
the Watch Station.
If the MFD is placed on a Watch Station location, then it has acknowledge rights for alarms. Click the
Acknowledge button or press [F12] to acknowledge alarms. If several new alarms are present, it is
necessary to click on the button or press [F12] repeatedly as you are only allowed to acknowledge one
alarm at a time. Alternatively, you can also click the Acknowledge All button above the Alarm List.
You can also open the Alarm List first in a frame of the application area. In that frame, you can then
check the details of the alarms and acknowledge the alarms. See See chapter E - 6.8 on page 127.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-129

6.11 Processing Alarms Using MCS Platinum
This section describes an example of the general alarm handling procedure using a MFD. For more infor-
mation on alarms and alarm handling, refer to the introductory chapters. See chapter E - 3.6 on page
27. The specific alarm handling procedures when using the panels is described in the chapter dealing
with the panel operation. See See chapter E - 5.17 on page 105.
Please note that the descriptions of the alarm processing measures only cover
the steps in the context of the NACOS Platinum. For information regarding
remedial action in the systems which triggered an alarm, please refer to the
documentation of the respective systems. Remedial action regarding NACOS
Platinum system alarms is described separately.
Scenario: An alarm occurs in one of the alarm systems, e.g. a machinery alarm. The responsible Watch
Station (ECR) has the Attended WS status and operates in Basic mode. On the WS panel, the Alarm LED
is on and the buzzer sounds. On the MFD located at the Watch Station the buzzer icon and the alarm
message in the header flash. Depending on the configuration, additional signals like rotating lights or
external horns are on.
Proceed as follows to process the alarm described above:
1. Stop Horn
On the MFD of the Watch Station, click on Stop Horn.
For more information on alarms and alarm handling, refer to the introductory chapters.
Check the number of messages and the message output on the sidebar’s Alarm expander of the
MCS Platinum application on the MFD in order to get a first impression of what has happened.
3. Acknowledge alarm
Click on Acknowledge in the Alarm expander to acknowledge the alarm, or right-click on the
message and select Acknowledge in the context menu. You can also first open the Alarm List (see
next step) and acknowledge the alarm(s) there.
If you fail to acknowledge the alarm, this will result in an All Operators Call after a specified time.
For more information on alarms and alarm handling, refer to the introductory chapters.
4. View details
Open the Alarm List. See chapter E - 6.8 on page 127.
In the Alarm List, double-click on the message of the alarm to open the Channel Properties.
If appl., locate the respective monitoring channel or device in the mimic diagrams.
Regarding NACOS Platinum system alarms, please refer to the relevant explanations in the alarm
message documentation.
E-130 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

5. Manual cut-out, manually disable?

See chapter E - 3.7 on page 29. If required, adjust the channel properties.
6. Remedy
If the alarm is due to a system alarm, please refer to the relevant explanations in the alarm message
documentation.
7. Verify result
View the Alarm List, and if required the mimic diagram channel parameters of the relevant moni-
toring channel to see if the monitoring channel and its values have returned to a normal state.
If required, specifically monitor the related channels in the Measurements expander. See chapter E
- 6.6 on page 122. You can also set up a graph continuously to monitor the output values of the
relevant monitoring channels.
9. Close all windows which are no longer required to return to the basic mode of the MFD.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-131

E-132 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

NACOS Platinum E-7 Quick Reference – Functional Modes and Menus of Panels
7 Quick Reference – Functional Modes and Menus of Panels
In this chapter you will find an overview of the functional modes and menus of the DAP and LOP panel
types for operation of the MCS Platinum. A sub-section is provided for each of the keys on the panels
and. Cross-references will guide you to the relevant descriptions of the functions. For a list of the avail-
able function keys, refer to section 5.3.6 on page E 50.
7.1 [DIMMER]
When you press the [DIMMER] key, the following options are available:
Selection Selection Selection Selection Result /
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Comment
[S1] Adjust setting using See section 5.2.1 on page E 47.
LCD Display arrow keys
View Angle arrow keys
LED Display arrow keys
[S4] Adjust setting using Only available on DAP Bridge.
Background arrow keys See section 5.2.4 on page E 48.
7.2 [ALARM LIST]
When you press the [ALARM LIST] key, you will be prompted to select the alarm system, if multiple
alarm systems are defined. Up to 4 alarm systems are possible, see The following table shows an
example:
[S1] Navigate through list. The respective Alarm List is dis-
Mach Alm Sys played immediately.
See section 5.8 on page E 57.
Bridge Alm Sys played immediately.
Cargo Alm Sys played immediately.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-133

AppendixMENUSTRUCTURE.fm / 14.12.11
E-7 Quick Reference – Functional Modes and Menus of Panels NACOS Platinum
7.3 [ADD. LISTS]
The functional modes behind the [ADD. LISTS] button are different for DAPs and LOPs.
7.3.1 [ADD. LISTS] on DAP (not LOP)
When you press the [ADD. LISTS] key on a DAP, the following options are available:
[S1] [S1] Simulated Use softkeys to The respective list is displayed
Suppressed [S2] Manual Cutout select the desired immediately.
[S3] Auto-Cutout alarm system. See section 5.9.1 on page E 59.
[S2] [S1] Sensor Fail Use softkeys to The respective list is displayed
Fail [S2] Device Fail select the desired immediately.
alarm system. See section 5.9.2 on page E 60.
[S3] [S1] Prio 1 Alarms Use softkeys to The respective list is displayed
Alarms [S2] Prio 1+2 Alarms select the desired immediately.
[S3] All Alarms alarm system. See section 5.9.3 on page E 60.
7.3.2 [ADD. LISTS] on LOP
When you press the [ADD. LISTS] key on a LOP, you first have to select whether the desired list shall
be displayed for the Local PLC or for the Entire System, see 5.9 on page E 58. After that, the options
are the same as on other panels:
[S1] [S1] [S1] Simulated Use softkeys to The selection in level 1 will nar-
Local PLC Suppressed [S2] Manual Cutout select the desired row down or widen the selection
[S2] [S3] Auto-Cutout alarm system. of entries to be listed.
Entire System
The respective list is displayed
immediately.
See section 5.9.1 on page E 59.
[S2] [S1] Sensor Fail Use softkeys to The respective list is displayed
Fail [S2] Device Fail select the desired immediately.
alarm system. See section 5.9.2 on page E 60.
[S3] [S1] Prio 1 Alarms Use softkeys to The respective list is displayed
Alarms [S2] Prio 1+2 Alarms select the desired immediately.
[S3] All Alarms alarm system. See section 5.9.3 on page E 60.
E-134 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

7.4 [DISPLAY CHANNEL] and [ADJUST CHANNEL]
Use [DISPLAY CHANNEL] to display the channel parameters of a monitoring channel, and use [ADJUST
CHANNEL] to change parameters of the selected monitoring channel.
7.4.1 [DISPLAY CHANNEL]
NOTE:
Remember that you can also press the [DISPLAY CHANNEL] key when you display the alarm
or status of the desired monitoring channels in the Alarm List, Cut-Out List, etc. to call up the
channel parameters of that channel directly.
When you press the [DISPLAY CHANNEL] key to display and change the channel parameters of a moni-
toring channel, the following options are available:
[S1] Step through list and
Step All press [ENT].
[S2] Step through list of If required, press The channel parameters for the
Step Analog analog channels and [ADJUST CHANNEL] selected monitoring channel are
press [ENT]. to change selected displayed.
parameters.
[S3] Enter User ID of the See 7.4.2 below. See section 5.10 on page E 61.
User ID desired monitoring
channel.
7.4.2 [ADJUST CHANNEL] (WS or LOP)
On the Watch Station or the related LOP, you can press [ADJUST CHANNEL] to change parameters of a
monitoring channel. Before you can do so, you have to display the respective channel, see 7.4.1 above.
Never adjust parameters, if you are not sure about the consequences of the
changes! For example, if you set a high temperature limit to a very high
value, this might prevent important alarms resulting in damage to equipment
an consequential accidents in operation!
The function works as follows:
Enter the required Use arrow keys to Enter or select the Only some of the channel
password. select the desired desired value and parameters can be changed, see
parameter, and press press [ENT].
[ENT]. See section 5.10.6 on page E 67.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-135

7.5 [WATCH]
When you press the [WATCH] key, the available options depend on the panel on which you press the
key.
7.5.1 [WATCH] on the Watch Station
When you press the [WATCH] key on the Watch Station, the following options are available:
Use softkeys to select [S1] Same function as pressing
the desired alarm sys- Quit [ESC]. This will exit the function
tem. without making any changes.
[S2] This will make this panel the
Select as WS Watch Station for the selected
alarm system, see 5.11.1 on
page E 71.
7.5.2 [WATCH] on the Requesting Panel (Select Unattended)
When you press the [WATCH] key to request the Unattended status for the Watch Station, then the
following options are available:
Use softkeys to select [S1] Same function as pressing
the desired alarm sys- Quit [ESC]. This will exit the function
tem. without making any changes.
[S2] [S1] The status of the Watch Station
Select Unatt Quit will change accordingly, see
5.11.2 on page E 72.
If the current status This will cancel the
is already Unat- process.
tended, then this
option will be Select
Att.
E-136 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

7.5.3 [WATCH] on the Acknowledging Panel
When you press the [WATCH] key on the panel, on which the watch selection shall be acknowledged,
then the following options are available:
[S1] The status of the Watch Station
Reject Change will not change, see 5.11.2 on
page E 72.
[S2] The status of the Watch Station
Accept Change will change accordingly, see
5.11.2 on page E 72.
7.6 [DUTY]
The available functions when pressing the [DUTY] key depend on the panel you are working on, as well
as on the configuration.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-137

7.6.1 [DUTY] on a Cabin Panel
Cabin panel in Panel mode:

[S1] Panel Setup Select alarm system [S1] Quit
[S2] Panel Public Panel will behave like a public
panel. See also next table for
panel in Public Room Panel
mode.
See also section 5.12.1 on page

E 75.
[S2] System Status [S1]
Deadman Status See also section 5.12.1 on page
[S2] E 75.
ALM SYS Status
Cabin panel in Public Room Panel mode (see above):

[S1] Panel Setup [S1] Quit
[S2] Buzzer Bip S2: to toggle between beep and

continuous sound.
[S3] Panel Mode [S1] Quit

[S2] Panel Cabin S2: to reset the panel to Cabin
Panel mode.

E 75.
[S2] System Status [S1] S1 & S2:
Deadman Status to display status information
[S2] See also section 5.12.1 on page
ALM SYS Status E 75.
7.6.2 [DUTY] on a Public Room Panel

[S1] Panel Setup [S1] Quit
[S2] Buzzer Bip S2: to toggle between beep and

continuous sound.

E 76.
E-138 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)


[S2] System Status [S1] Select deadman or
Deadman Status alarm system S1 & S2:
[S2] to display status information
ALM SYS Status
7.6.3 [DUTY] on a Bridge / WS Panel

[S2] System Status [S1] Select deadman sys- To display status information
Deadman Status tem or alarm system
[S2]
ALM SYS Status
[S3] Duty Select [S1] No Duty Officer [S1] Stop Select S1: cancel Options on level 2 highly depend
[S2] Chief [S2] Ackn Select S2: acknowledge on the NACOS Platinum configu-
[S3] 2nd Eng. selection directly ration.
[S4 3rd Eng. from that panel.
See also 5.12.5 on page E 77.
[S4] Backup Select [S1] [S1] Stop Select S1: cancel Options on level 2 highly depend
[S2] 1st. Off. [S2] Ackn Select S2: acknowledge on the NACOS Platinum configu-
[S3] 2nd. Off. selection directly ration.
from that panel.
See also 5.12.5 on page E 77.
[DUTY] on the cabin panel of the selected duty/backup:

[ENT] To accept the selection.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-139

7.7 [ASSIST CALL]
The available Assist Call functions depend on whether you work on the calling panel or on a called panel.
7.7.1 [ASSIST CALL] on the Calling Panel
When you press the [ASSIST CALL] key on the panel to call a crew member or a group of crew members
for help, then the available options depend on the system configuration and on the current location. For
example, when you are in the chief engineer’s cabin, there will be no option to call the chief engineer
for assistance. The following table shows an example:
[S1] Call to all crew members, see
Call to All 5.13.2 on page E 84.
[S2] Call to all engineers, see 5.13.2
All Engineers Press [ENT] to cancel on page E 84.
[S3] or complete the call. Call to all officers, see 5.13.2 on
All Officers page E 84.
[S4] More [S1] Chief Call to a specific crew member,
[S2] 2nd Eng. see 5.13.1 on page E 82.
[S3] 3rd Eng.
[S4] More [S1] Captain
[S2] 1st Off.
[S3] 2nd Off.
[S4] More S4 = return to level 1
7.7.2 [ASSIST CALL] on a Called Panel
When you press the [ASSIST CALL] key on a panel which receives an assist call, then the following
options are available:
Press [ENT] to Depending on the type of call at
acknowledge the call. least the buzzer stops, see 5.13
on page E 82.
E-140 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

7.8 [PRINTER CONTROL]
When you press the [PRINTER CONTROL] key, the following options to print lists are available,
depending on the configuration of the NACOS Platinum:
[S1] Alarm List Use softkeys to See also 5.14.1 on page E 86.
select the desired
alarm system.
[S2] Add. List [S1] Suppressed [S1] Simulated See also 5.14.2 on page E 86.
[S2] Manual Cutout
[S3] Auto-Cutout
Use softkeys to
select the desired
[S2] Fail [S1] Sensor Fail alarm system.
[S2] Device Fail
[S3] Alarms [S1] Prio 1 Alarms

[S2] Prio 1+2 alarms
[S3] All Alarms
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-141


[S2] Printer Config Enter the required [S1] Datalog Format [S1] Compressed Datalog Format: Select the
See 5.14.3 on page E password. And use softkeys to [S2] Extended desired degree of detail for the
88. select the desired datalog.
alarm system.
[S2] Auto Print [S1] Alarm List Auto Print: For the report
[S2] Add. List selected in level 4, select a
[S3] Datalog report using the softkeys and
And use softkeys to then enter start time and inter-
select the desired val of printing for the respective
alarm system. list.
[S4] More The available reports depend on
the NACOS Platinum configura-
tion.
[S3] Choose Printer [S1] Alarm List
Choose Printer: For the report

[S2] Add. List selected in level 4, select Printer
1 or Printer 2, or select Print Dis-
able using the softkeys. Print
[S3] Datalog Disable will suppress printing of
the respective report.
The available reports depend on
[S4] More, and then the NACOS Platinum configura-
[S1] tion.
Manoeuv. Alm. Log
[S2] ...
[S4] Cancel Print Use softkeys to

select the respective
printer.
Cancel Print: The printing proc-
ess is aborted.
([PRINTER CONTROL] [S1] S1: print the

continued) Manoeuv Datalog Manoeuvre Datalog
immediately
[S4] More [S2] Select Channel Select channel: This is not part
of the current software release.
[S3] Datalog Use softkeys to

select the desired
alarm system.
[S4] More [S1] S1 and S2: use

Changed Mon. Ch. softkeys to select the
[S2] desired alarm sys-
ALM. Sys Report tem.
[S3]
Report Status
[S4] More S4 = return to level 1
E-142 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

7.9 [MAINTENANCE]
In this functional mode you can adjust various settings of the NACOS Platinum. Most of the functions are
password-protected, and some functions are available to SAM Electronics personnel only.
[S1] Local time and UTC are dis-
Display Time played.
[S2] Version information are dis-
Version Control played, see 5.15.2 on page E 95.
[S3] [S1] Set UTC [S1] Set Time Enter the value.
Set Time [S2] Set Date Enter the value.
[S2] Set LT [S1] Set Time Enter the desired off-

set.
Time +/- 60 depends on setting
[S2] Zone Adjust Enter value. made using Zone Adjust, see
5.15.4 on page E 96.
[S3] Time +60 S3 and S4:
[S4] Time -60 [S1] Quit
[S2] Accept
[S4] More: All LEDs and indications light up,
[S1] Lamp Test Press [ESC] to stop the buzzer sounds, see 5.15.5
the test. on page E 99.
[S2] Select UTC/LT [S1] Quit If UTC was the current selection,
[S2] UTC then S2 is "LT", see 5.15.6 on
page E 99.
[S3] Commiss Mode Commiss Mode is for

SAM Electronics personnel only.
[S4] More [S1]

Change PW LEV 1 Enter required pass- See 5.15.8 C h a n g i n g P a s s w o r d s
[S2] word, then enter the on page E 100.
Change PW LEV 2 new password twice.
[S3]
Change PW LEV 3
[S4] More
[S1] Enter required pass-

Change PW LEV 4 word, then enter the
new password twice.
[S2] S2 & S3:

System PW LEV For SAM Electronics
[S3] personnel only.
Watchdog TST
[S4] [S1] Store Setup S1 = Setup stored immediately

More [S4] More S4 = return to level 1.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) E-143

7.10 [DEADMAN]
When you press the [DEADMAN] key, the following options are available:
[S1] Unfit Mach. [S1] Start Press key to reset S1: Deadman timer is started
[S2] Unfit Bridge timer.
[S4] Adjust time S4: set the deadman timer
See 5.16 on page E 102.
E-144 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

ALARMS
NACOS Platinum V-1 General Information
1 General Information
In NACOS Platinum all alarms will generally be indicated in the same way in all cases. Both alarms from
the automation system and alarms from the navigation system are shown in the same place and in the
same way but their availability on the different MFDs is depending on their specific configuration.
It has been chosen to indicate the different states of an alarm by different symbols in dedicated colors.
Furthermore, the alarms have different audible indications emitted by the buzzer which is installed in
every MFD.
The symbols will be used in the following manner:
- Placed in front of the alarm line in Alarm Lists
- Placed in front of the label in the permanent area of

RADAR and ECDIS as status indicators on other places of
the HMI.
If the automation system is configured for the MFD, symbols will also be used as follows:
- As a separate symbol in Mimic Diagrams for binary alarms. (e.g. used for a level switch in a tank).
- As a symbol placed behind the Unit of an analogue value displayed on a Mimic Diagram (e.g. used
for display of a temperature with a limit).
- As a symbol placed beside a Function Block symbol (indicating the state of machinery components,
e.g. pumps, valves, generators etc.
Alarms and Warnings can be accompanied by a sound signal. The possible sounds emitted by the buzzer
are as follows:
Sequence Meaning Description
... Alarm (Priority 1) Permanent tone

Warning (Priority 2) tone (1 sec), pause (1 sec), tone (1 sec), pause (7 sec)
... as warning(s) but suppressable
Warning (Priority 3)
For warnings with priority 3 the sound can be deactivated by the operator (see xyz).
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) V-3

V Alarms.fm / 14.12.11
V-1 General Information NACOS Platinum
1.1 Colour code for the alarm indications:
Green
Indication of an exceeded limit that shall not raise an alarm (Alarm priority 4).
Yellow
Input from the process is disconnected in the software, and the value is entered manually by
the operator
Yellow
Incidents and (pre)warnings, usually alarm priority 3. For alarms of this prority, the acoustic
alarm can be switched off
Orange
Warnings and alarms that require immediate action, usually alarm priority 2
Red
A serious event that has not been solved yet, usually alarm priority 1
Yellow & red

A value that had been entered manually by the operator has caused an alarm priority 1
Examples for alarm indications:
Fig. V / 1 Alarm Indications
V-4 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

A flashing symbol for any alarm means that this alarm has not been acknowledged yet. A steady symbol
indicates an acknowledged status of an alarm, but that the cause for the alarm is still present.
An alarm can be of the following types:
State Symbol Explanation/Remarks
Normal - No errors in hardware/software and no limits exceeded
Device fail Error in the Control and Supervision system, the indication is invalid
Sensor fail The value received from the sensor is outside the legal limits
Alarm function is switched off by the operator. Alarm will never occur
Manual Cut Out even if limits are exceeded. Manual Cut Out is normally not used for
Function Blocks
Indication of an exceeded limit that shall not raise an alarm (Alarm

priority 4). This case is normally not indicated in the Mimic Diagram. In
Event some cases an indication for a binary input is displayed (e.g. Heater
switched on)
Alarm with lowest priority. The alarm is indicated by a triangle (like a

traffic sign) in yellow. Inside the triangle the alarm priority is indicated
Alarm priority 3 by the number 3, to improve readability for people with color blindness
(since prio 1 and 2 are also triangles)
Alarm with middle priority. The alarm is indicated by a triangle (like a

traffic sign) in orange. Inside the triangle the alarm priority is indicated
Alarm priority 2 by the number 2, to improve readability for people with color blindness
(since prio 1 and 3 are also triangles)
Alarm with highest priority. The alarm is indicated by a triangle (like a

traffic sign) in red. (red is mandatory for highest priority alarm). Inside
Alarm priority 1 the triangle the alarm priority is indicated by the number 1, to improve
readability for people with color blindness (since prio 2 and 3 are also
triangles)
Input from the process is disconnected in the software, and the value
is entered manually by the operator. In this case a blue circle is added
behind the actual alarm symbol, and for analogue values the font is
Manual Set exchanged by a script font. For Function Blocks it is possible to make
"Manual Set" for both the alarm and the process feedback, so you may
have a blue circle behind the alarm icon and/or behind the state
symbol
Manual Set This is the same as the Manual Set described above. For this value
Alarm priority 3 an alarm with priority 3 has occurred and is now indicated.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) V-5

1.2 Overview of the alarm window
Alarm Line:
(The alarm with highest priority is indicated here)
Visual indication Buttons for operator reac-
for the horn tions to the indicated alarm
Alarm List.
Oldest un- To open, click on this
acknowledged icon.
alarm with
priority indica- To show the alarm-
tion source and state,
click on the line
Alarms List:
Alarm list in opened
state.
Visual indication
for the horn Selection and indication
of listed alarm criteria
Buttons for
reactions to
alarms
displayed in the
Alarm list, the list
first alarm has
been selected Alarm list
by the operator. scrollbar
Newest Alarm. See

1.2.1 on page V-7 for
details.
Number of alarms, alarms eight Unit and application that have origi-
to eleven are visible in the list. nated the alarm, alarm number and
status
List Criteria:
By means of the list criteria, the

clearness of the list can be
improved. Only the chosen
criteria/subcriteria of alarms will
be displayed
☞ If the alarm list is opened by the Alarm List icon (see above) or by a click on the Alarms Tab, it
always shows the complete list of alarms, warnings and indications, independent of the previously
made selections of filters or priorities in the list. The list then shows the newest alarm entry at the
bottom of the alarm window.
V-6 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

1.2.1 Example of an alarm
Additionally to the alarm designation, supplemental information are displayed for each active alarm in the
list. In this example, MFD M01 has originated the alarm:
Designation of the
alarm
Date and time of first

occurence of the alarm
MFD-Id, Application Id
and Alarm number Status
The alarm number is M01AI061, where AI ist the indication for the AIS unit, 061 is the internal fault
number. See list of alarms for further information.
The status is Alarm, which means that the alarm is still active (in alarm state).
Status indications can be for example:

- Normal
- Alarm
- Sens Fail (Sensor Failure)
- Dev. Fail (Device Failure)
- Comm. Error (Communication Error)
- Ch. Error (Channel Error)
- SW. Error (Software Error)
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) V-7

V-8 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

NACOS Platinum V-2 Alarm Management
2 Alarm Management
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) V-9

V-2 Alarm Management NACOS Platinum
2.1 Behaviour when an Alarm comes up
Whenever an alarm is raised, the processing is a two-step action:

1. Switch off the acoustic alarm, if there is one. Use the Stop Horn button in the GUI
or press the Stop

Buzzer button on the keyboard, if it is available.
☞ Some alarms do not trigger the acoustic alarm. This depends on the settings made in the configu-
ration database of the Integration Manager.
☞ Some alarms can only be switched off at the MFD that has originated the alarm. For example, a
Trackpilot alarm can only be acknowledged at the MFD that is set as Trackpilot Master.
2. Immediately obtain information about the causes of the alarm or warning, about the system state
and about possible system reactions, and - if necessary - immediately perform all necessary actions
for the avoidance of possible danger.
3. Remove the cause of the alarm or warning: If an alarm has occurred due to a cause that can be
removed, that cause must be removed as quickly as possible; see also the lists of alarms in the
following chapters. Alarms with priority 4 disappear when the cause disappears. Acknowledgement
is then unnecessary. Alarms with priority 1, 2 and 3 must be acknowledged in any case.
4. The alarms with priority 1 and many alarms of priority 2 and 3 must be acknowledged if the situa-
tion allows or requires such acknowledgement. There are two possibilities to acknowledge alarms:
- Click on Acknowledge in the alarm line
- Click on Acknowledge All in the heading of the Alarm list
If alarms or warnings are also distributed to other items of equipment within the system, or if the system
deviates from the behaviour described above, e.g.
- if the alarm cannot be acknowledged at all or throughout the entire system, or
- if acknowledgement causes something to be initiated or enabled, or
- if an acknowledged alarm is repeated for as long as the cause of the alarm continues to exist.
These situations are mentioned in the lists of alarms in the following chapters.
Removing acknowledged alarms from the list is done automatically by the system, in case the alarm
reason is no longer valid, or the application or operating mode has been switched off.
V-10 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

NACOS Platinum V-3 Machinery Alarms
3 Machinery Alarms
System Alarms
Besides the alerts delivered by the different applications running on the MFD or which are received from
the connected equipment, sub-systems and sensors, there is a list of alarms, warnings and indications
which can additionally be issued by the integrated system and displayed on any MFD.
These alerts are not connected to any application but to a system monitoring process running partly on
each MFD and on the Data Processing Unit.
The possible systems alarms are very much depending on the installed system structure and components
available on board and they are therefore part of the configuration database created for your ship.
The following list of alarms can therefore only be an example, covering the most probable alarms which
can be expected on small systems as shown in Figure I / 2 (an IMO RADAR Set with 2 RADARs) or larger
systems as shown in Figure I / 4 (a system for large ships).
Master DPU: Status of DPU 2

The DPU or DCU which is currently running as the master has detected a problem with the secondary
DPU.
Master DPU: Status of MFD (1 … N)

The DPU or DCU which is currently running as the master has detected a problem with one of the
installed MFDs. (1 … N) is indicating the range of identification number of the MFDs.
DPU 1: SIO card 1 Channel (n)

The DPU or DCU has detected a problem with one of the installed serial I/O cards.
(n) is indicating the channel number on the SIO.
DPU 1: SIO card 2 Channel (n)

The DPU or DCU has detected a problem with one of the installed serial I/O cards.
(n) is indicating the channel number on the SIO.
DPU 1: SIO on CPU Board

The DPU or DCU has detected a problem with the on-board serial I/O channel.
Module 01C2C001 (SIO 2010) err

The serial I/O module with the identification 01C2C001 is reporting an internal error.
Note:
As soon as you add a Monitoring and Control System (MCS) as part of the NACOS Platinum, the number
of integrated and ship dependent monitoring and alarm functions will be increased significantly. In this
case refer also to the Commissioning Protocol which includes the complete list of alarms for the system
installed on your ship. This document should also be available in printed form in the ship's files.
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) V-1

N AUTOMATION ALARMS.fm / 14.12.11
V-3 Machinery Alarms NACOS Platinum
The alarm priority of these alarms is generally defined by the system configuration which is only acces-
sible by the so called Integration Manager, an offline tool for the manufacturer's commissioning and
service organisation. The output of this tool is a database which is loaded into the system (the MFDs and
the DPUs) after the database has been adapted to the system structure and its interfaces.
Refer to the part D Machinery MCS Platinum in these operating instructions for a comprehensive descrip-
tion of the MCS integrated alarm system with all its sub-functions and possible settings.
V-2 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

N AUTOMATION ALARMS.fm / 14.12.11
LISTS AND INDEXES
NACOS Platinum List of Figures
List of Figures
Fig. I/ 1 MFD console design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-22
Fig. I/ 2 Minimum installation – IMO set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-23
Fig. I/ 3 Example of a small-ship installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-24
Fig. I/ 4 Example of a large-ship installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-24
Fig. I/ 5 MFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-28
Fig. I/ 6 Possible pointing devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-30
Fig. I/ 7 Keyboard of a console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-32
Fig. I/ 8 Onscreen keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-32
Fig. I/ 9 The Optional ASCII Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-33
Fig. I/ 10 The RADAR Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-34
Fig. I/ 11 The Trackpilot Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-35
Fig. I/ 12 Date and Time Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-43
Fig. I/ 13 Example of Super Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-46
Fig. I/ 14 General screen layout of the NACOS Platinum (RADAR Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-47
Fig. I/ 15 NACOS Platinum title bar of RADAR application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-48
Fig. I/ 16 Color schemes of the Color & settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-48
Fig. I/ 17 Active Application Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-49
Fig. I/ 18 RADAR sidebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-51
Fig. I/ 19 Sidebar – permanent area of the RADAR application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-52
Fig. I/ 20 Sidebar – example of the non-permanent area of the RADAR application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-54
Fig. I/ 21 Opened NACOS Platinum main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-56
Fig. I/ 22 ECDIS in full screen mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-58
Fig. I/ 23 Application area frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-60
Fig. I/ 24 Example: Machinery screen with three frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-60
Fig. I/ 25 Example: Machinery screen with tabbed panels in three frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-62
Fig. I/ 26 Tab after using tear-off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-63
Fig. I/ 27 Example 1: Target List in RADAR sidebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-64
Fig. I/ 28 Example 2: Alarm List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-64
Fig. I/ 29 Tooltip of a menu item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-68
Fig. I/ 30 Examples of NACOS Platinum controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-69
Fig. I/ 31 Zoom and pan control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-79
Fig. I/ 32 Visualisation types of indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-80
Fig. I/ 33 Example of alarm types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-81
Fig. E/ 1 The MCS Platinum in its overall system environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9
Fig. E/ 2 MCS Platinum system architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10
Fig. E/ 3 Stand-Alone alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
Fig. E/ 4 Basic alarm system for unattended machinery area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12
Fig. E/ 5 Extended alarm system for unattended machinery area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13
Fig. E/ 6 Logic conditions for binary channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-20
Fig. E/ 7 Logic conditions for analog channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-22
Fig. E/ 8 Example of a panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-41
Fig. E/ 9 Panel keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-44
Fig. E/ 10 Select dimmer function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-47
Fig. E/ 11 Adjusting the LCD intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-48
Fig. E/ 12 Softkeys on a DAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-49
Fig. E/ 13 Example menu path of a functional mode – Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-51
Fig. E/ 14 Selecting an alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-54
Fig. E/ 15 Selecting an alarm system – example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-54
Fig. E/ 16 Alarm List – example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-54
Fig. E/ 17 Entering a password on a DAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-55
Fig. E/ 18 Error message after of incorrect password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-56
Fig. E/ 19 Alarms displayed in Basic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-56
Fig. E/ 20 Alarm List displayed on a DAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-57
ED 3100 G 150 / Rev 03 (2011-12) VI-3

OI_ANC2010_LOF.fm
List of Figures NACOS Platinum
Fig. E / 21 Add. Lists – selecting a list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-59

Fig. E / 22 Add. Lists – selecting a list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-59
Fig. E / 23 Automatic Cut-Out List – example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-60
Fig. E / 24 Device Fail list – example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-60
Fig. E / 25 Prio 1 Alarm list – example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-61
Fig. E / 26 Display Channel mode on a DAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-61
Fig. E / 27 Display Channel mode on a Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-61
Fig. E / 28 Stepping through the channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-62
Fig. E / 29 Selecting a channel for display when 3 alarms are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-63
Fig. E / 30 Selected channel showing details on an alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-64
Fig. E / 31 Adjust Channel – example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-67
Fig. E / 32 Entering a new parameter value – example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-67
Fig. E / 33 Adjust Channel – Manual Cut-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-69
Fig. E / 34 Setting the Cut-Out parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-69
Fig. E / 35 Adjust Channel – Manual Cut-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-70
Fig. E / 36 Setting the Simulation parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-70
Fig. E / 37 Setting the Simulation value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-70
Fig. E / 38 Adjust Channel – Simulation is On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-70
Fig. E / 39 Simulated output value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-71
Fig. E / 40 Selecting the DAP as Watch Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-72
Fig. E / 41 Selecting between Attended/Unattended Watch Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-72
Fig. E / 42 Status change requested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-73
Fig. E / 43 Accepting a status change (bridge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-73
Fig. E / 44 WS status change acknowledged. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-73
Fig. E / 45 Acknowledging WS status change rejection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-74
Fig. E / 46 Cancelling WS status change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-74
Fig. E / 47 Selecting Duty (Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-75
Fig. E / 48 Selecting Duty (DAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-75
Fig. E / 49 Selecting a panel setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-75
Fig. E / 50 Resetting a panel setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-76
Fig. E / 51 Resetting a panel setup to cabin panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-76
Fig. E / 52 Display status on Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation – example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-77
Fig. E / 55 Display deadman status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-77
Fig. E / 56 Selecting a duty officer/engineer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-78
Fig. E / 57 Duty request on the WS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-78
Fig. E / 58 Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation – acknowledge prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-78
Fig. E / 59 Duty selection acknowledged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-79
Fig. E / 60 Duty request on a Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation not inolved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-79
Fig. E / 61 Selecting a backup officer/engineer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-80
Fig. E / 62 Backup request on the WS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-80
Fig. E / 63 Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation – Backup Select function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-81
Fig. E / 64 Backup selection acknowledged. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-81
Fig. E / 65 Backup request on a Duty Alarm Panel Accommodation not involved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-81
Fig. E / 66 Calling for assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-82
Fig. E / 67 Assist Call initiated from a DAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-83
Fig. E / 68 Assist Call display in the cabin of the called person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-83
Fig. E / 69 Acknowledged Assist Call on a DAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-83
Fig. E / 70 Assist call in progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-84
Fig. E / 73 Printer control – display 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-85
Fig. E / 74 Selecting a cut-out list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-86
Fig. E / 75 Printer configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-88
VI-4 ED 3100 G 150 / Rev 03 (2011-12)

OI_ANC2010_LOF.fm
NACOS Platinum List of Figures
Fig. E/ 76 Selecting the datalog format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-89

Fig. E/ 77 Adjusting the Auto Print timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-89
Fig. E/ 78 Example of selection between adjustment of the start time or interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-90
Fig. E/ 79 Setting the Auto Print start time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-90
Fig. E/ 80 Setting the Auto Print interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-90
Fig. E/ 81 Printer Select function – display 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-91
Fig. E/ 82 Selecting the printer for a report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-91
Fig. E/ 83 Version information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-95
Fig. E/ 84 Setting the UTC time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-96
Fig. E/ 85 Setting the date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-96
Fig. E/ 86 Setting time and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-97
Fig. E/ 87 Setting the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-97
Fig. E/ 88 Local Time menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-97
Fig. E/ 89 Adding 60 minutes to the Local Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-98
Fig. E/ 90 Zone Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-98
Fig. E/ 91 Changing the zone adjust value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-98
Fig. E/ 92 Local Time menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-99
Fig. E/ 93 Toggling between UTC and LT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-99
Fig. E/ 94 Level 2 password prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-100
Fig. E/ 95 Changing the level 1 password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-100
Fig. E/ 96 Selecting a deadman alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-103
Fig. E/ 97 Deadman systems status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-103
Fig. E/ 98 Deadman time prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-103
Fig. E/ 99 Deadman system status on a two-line LCD of a LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-104
Fig. E/ 100 Deadman systems status – On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-105
Fig. E/ 101 MCS Platinum screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-112
Fig. E/ 102 MCS Platinum permanent area of the sidebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-115
Fig. E/ 103 MCS Platinum non-permanent area of the sidebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-116
Fig. E/ 104 One (left) or two (right) alarm systems in alarm system groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-117
Fig. E/ 105 Example of a MCS Platinum with two deadman systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-120
Fig. E/ 106 Alarms expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-121
Fig. E/ 107 Alarm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-121
Fig. E/ 108 Measurements expander: select channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-123
Fig. E/ 109 Measurements expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-123
Fig. E/ 110 The mimics browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-124
Fig. E/ 111 Mimic diagram with a right-click on a pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-125
Fig. E/ 112 Properties of a pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-126
Fig. E/ 113 Alarm List in the application area of the MCS Platinum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-127
Fig. E/ 114 Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-128
Fig. V/ 1 Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-4
ED 3100 G 150 / Rev 03 (2011-12) VI-5

OI_ANC2010_LOF.fm
List of Figures NACOS Platinum
VI-6 ED 3100 G 150 / Rev 03 (2011-12)

OI_ANC2010_LOF.fm
NACOS Platinum Index
Index
Symbols acknowledging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-27
[?] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . E-50, E-114 All Operators Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29, E-34
[?] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . E-50, E-114 always announced on bridge . . . . . . . . . E-35
[?] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . E-50, E-114 announcement . . . . . . . . . . E-15, E-27, E-35
[?] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . E-50, E-114 Cut-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29
[?] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50 deadman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-37
[?] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50 defective sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29
[?] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50 detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15
[?] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50 disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29
[ACKN ALARM] . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . E-36 groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30
[ADD. LIST] . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . E-51 log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-37
[ADD. LISTS] . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . E-58 logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15
[ADJUST CHANNEL] . .. . .. . . . . . . . E-51, E-67 Normal status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-28
[ALARM ACKN] . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50 notification of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15
[ALARM LIST] . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . E-51, E-57 number of alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . E-56, E-57
[ASSIST CALL] . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . E-51, E-82 priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29
[DEADMAN] . . . . . . . .. . .. . E-51, E-103, E-104 rank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29
[DIMMER] . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . E-46, E-47 sensor failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29
[DISPLAY CHANNEL] . .. . .. . . . . . . . E-51, E-61 serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-40
[DUTY] . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . E-51, E-74 states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-28
[END] . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . E-114 suppressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29
[ENT] . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50 supressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29
[ESC] . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . E-49 timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-37
[HOME] . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . E-114 unacknowledged . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-28, E-30
[MAINTENANCE] . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . E-51, E-94 undesired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29
[PAGE DOWN] . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . E-114 ALARM ACKN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50
[PAGE UP] . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . E-114 alarm acknowledgement (Workstation) . . . E-129
[PRINTER CONTROL] .. . .. . . . . . . . E-51, E-85 alarm announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5, E-35
[S1] to [S4] softkeys . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . E-49 alarm channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18, E-19
[STOP HORN] . . . . . . .. . .. . . . E-35, E-36, E-50 alarm channel, select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-62
[WATCH] . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . E-51, E-71 Alarm Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
* (asterisk) . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . E-57, E-58 alarm display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-34
alarm group
Numerics acknowledged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30
5 min. alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6, E-34 status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30
Alarm Group LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-45
A alarm groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5, E-30
AAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-43 alarm handling (Workstation) . . . . . E-129, E-130
abort printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-88 alarm icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-81
accident prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-15, E-3 alarm lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-34
Accommodation Alarm Panel . . . E-32, E-33, E-43 Alarm LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-35, E-44
Accommodation Alarm System . . . . . . . E-5, E-31 alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-68
ACKN ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-36 ALARM LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-51
acknowledged alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-28 Alarm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5, E-37, E-57
acknowledged alarm group . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-86
acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-27 Alarm List toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-122
ADD. LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-51 Alarm Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-37
Add. List, printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-86 Alarm Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
ADD. LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-58 alarm printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10
Add. Lists (Workstation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-127 alarm priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-28
Additional Lists (Workstation) . . . . . . . . . . . E-127 alarm priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-28
ADJUST CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-51, E-67 alarm ranking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-28
alarm alarm states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-28
acknowledged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-28 alarm status,detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15
ED 3100 G 150 / Rev 03 (2011-12) VI-7

OI_ANC2010Index_IOM.fm
Index NACOS Platinum
alarm suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-68 Backup Navigator Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6

Alarm System Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-93 backup officer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-25, E-32
alarm systems bakup officer, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-80
select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-54 BAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7, E-10, E-26, E-41, E-42
alarm/event trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5 Basci Alarm Panel (Accommodation) . . . . . . . E-42
alarms Basic Alarm Panel . . . E-7, E-10, E-32, E-33, E-41
handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-105 Basic Alarm Panel (Accommodation) . . . . . . . E-43
measures to be taken . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-105 Basic Alarm Panel (Bridge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42
processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-105 Basic Alarm Panel (ECR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42
algebraic sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-43 Basic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-56
alive indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-49 binary alarm channel . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-18, E-19
All Engineers Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6, E-34 binary channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-19
All Navigators Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6 binary event channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18
All Operators Call . . .E-6, E-29, E-32, E-34, E-108 bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-33
alphanumeric values bridge alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-31
entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-52 bridge standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-25
ambient light conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-48 brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-48, E-47
analog alarm channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18, E-19 brightness, of display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-42
analog channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-22 buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39
analog event channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18 busy signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39
analog event channel with hysteresis . . . . . . E-18 buzzer . . . . . . . . . . E-16, E-34, E-35, E-41, E-45
announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-27 buzzer functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-35
announcement of alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15 buzzer patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-45
applicable standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-25
application area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-47, I-60 C
application example MCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11 C (Cargo alarms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-57
appliction main page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-47 Cabin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-119
arrow double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82 cabin panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-33, E-42
arrow keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50 calling crew members for assistance, see Assist Call
arrow pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82 calling engineers, see Assist Call
ASSIST CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-51 cancel printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-88
Assist Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6, E-37, E-82 Cargo Control Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-31
assist call CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-14
acknowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-83 CCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-31
cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-85 CCR panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42
stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-85 change password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-94, E-100
asterisk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-57, E-58 Changed Monitoring Channel list . . . . . . . . . E-93
Attended Watch Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-72 channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
Attended WS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-106, E-130 analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-22
Attended/Unattended Status (Workstation) .E-118 average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-18, E-22
Auto Cut-Out (Workstation) . . . . . . . . . . . .E-117 binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-19
Auto Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-89 constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
Automatic Alarm Cut-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30 hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
Automatic Cut-Out List . . . . . . . .E-29, E-58, E-59 input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
average channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18, E-22 output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
physical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
B software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
B (Bridge alarms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-57 channel ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-24
backlight intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-47 channel name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-24
backlight, of a panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-48 channel number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-24
backup channel parameters
acknowledge request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-80 adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-67
select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-80 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-67
Backup (Workstation) . . . . . . . . . . . E-117, E-119 viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-64
backup engineer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-32 channel text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-24
VI-8 ED 3100 G 150 / Rev 03 (2011-12)

channel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15 date setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-43

channel, select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-62 DEADMAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-51, E-103, E-104
check box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-69, I-75 Deadman Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
check mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-75 deadman alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-37, E-102
chn id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-24 acknowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-104
clear text output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-41 reset timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-104
click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-31 setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-102
clicks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-31 status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-104
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-63 Deadman Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-120
Color & Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-48 deadman reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-105
color schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-48 deadman system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-25
colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-48 deadman timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-104
colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-42 decimal places . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-43
commissioning decimal point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-43
safety defective sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29
commissioning I-19 definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
compass control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-79 delay, channel parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-68
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10 detection of alarm status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15
concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5 Device Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-28
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-23, E-14 device fail list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-58, E-60
Configuration Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6 Device Fail list (Workstation) . . . . . . . . . . . E-128
context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-31, I-63 dialogues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-66
contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-47 DIMMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-46, E-47
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-69, E-41, E-44 disabled lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-128
[ALARM ACKN] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50 disabling alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29
[STOP HORN] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50 disconnecting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
cursor and select keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50 disconnection procedures, general . . . . . . . . . I-15
function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50 display
conventions in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-10 numeric values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-43
cross hair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82 display (LCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-41, E-43
cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82 backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-48
cursor keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50 value range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-43
customisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-23, E-6, E-14 display brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-42
Cut-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6, E-29, E-68 DISPLAY CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-51, E-61
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30 display colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-42
manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29 display date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-95
Cut-Out List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-37, E-59 display deadman status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-77
Cut-Out Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-91 display duty status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-76, E-77
Cut-Out lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-58 display settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-42
cut-out lists (Workstation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-128 display time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-95
cut-outs (Workstation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-128 display time & date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-94
divider, between frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-60
D DO key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-30
DANGER . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-14 double arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82
dangerous voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-15 double-click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-31
data acquisition . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6, E-15 drawings, of panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-46
Datalog . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-37, E-92 dropdown menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-69, I-74
Datalog format . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-88 DUTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-51, E-74
date . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-49 Duty
displaying . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-95 Cabin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-119
entering . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-53 deadman status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-77
set . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-94 Panel Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-75, E-76
setting . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-95 select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-77
date format . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-53 system status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-76, E-77
ED 3100 G 150 / Rev 03 (2011-12) VI-9

duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . .E-108 G
acknowledge request .. . .. . . . . . . . . . E-78 gathering raw data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15
select . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . E-74 getting help, see Assist Call
Duty (Workstation) . . . . .. . .. . . . E-117, E-119 graphical representations (Workstation) . . . E-123
Duty Alarm Panel Bridge . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . E-32 Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-45
duty call . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . E-33, E-107 GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-45
duty engineeer . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . E-25 GUI controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-69
duty engineer . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . E-32 gun site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82
Duty Engineer Call . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . E-7
Duty LED . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . E-33, E-45 H
duty officer . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .E-25, E-32, E-33 handling alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-105
Duty Officer Call . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . E-7 hardware channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
duty officer, selecting . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . E-77 help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-46
help from other crew members, see Assist Call
E Help, how to find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-9
ECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-31 help, how to find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-8
ECR panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42 help, see Assist Call
edit window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-67 hide sidebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-57, I-58
electromagnetic radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-16 HOME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-114
electrostatic discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-16 Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-57
END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-114 horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-16, E-41
engine room panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42
Engineer Fitness Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7 I
ENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50 ID
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-49 channel ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. E-24
ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-16 IMO set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. I-23
event channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18, E-19 indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. E-41
Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-37 information, how to find . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . I-9
events input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. E-16
log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-37 input channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. E-16
logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15 interface, to external applications . .. . .. . .. E-40
expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-69
external keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-32 K
keyboard . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. I-32
F keypad . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. E-44
Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-57 keys . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. E-44
field group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-69, I-71 [ALARM ACKN] . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. E-50
fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-70 [ENT] . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. E-50
filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7 [ESC] . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. E-49
Fire Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-109 [S1] to [S4] . . . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. E-49
fitness check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7 [STOP HORN] . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. E-50
format cursor keys . . . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. E-50
date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-53 function keys . . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. E-50
numeric values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-43 menu navigation .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. E-50
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-53 mode keys . . . . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. E-50
fractional digits, see decimal places select keys . . . . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. E-50
frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-60 softkeys . . . . . . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. E-49
frames, multiple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-61
Full Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-57, I-58 L
function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50 lamp test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-94, E-99
function keys (Workstation) . . . . . . . . . . . .E-113 layout drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... E-46
function keys, onscreen (Workstation) . . . . .E-113 layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... I-60
functionality, of the MCS Platinum . . . . . . . . E-15 LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... E-43
brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... E-47
contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... E-47
VI-10 ED 3100 G 150 / Rev 03 (2011-12)

view angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-47 menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-51, I-56

LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-44 Menu button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-57
LEDs menu navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50
brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-47 mimic diagrams (Workstation) . . . . . . . . . . E-123
left mouse button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-30 minimum installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-23
light conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-48 monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-36
line printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-39 Monitoring Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
list of disabled channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-128 monitoring channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16, E-17
list of supressed channels (Workstation) . . . E-128 monitoring channel details . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-61
lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-64 monitoring channel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18
device fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-58, E-60 monitoring channels
navigation in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50 simulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-69
scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50 MORE key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-30
sensor fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-58, E-60 mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-30
stepping through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50 mouse pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82
live parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3 mouse, scroll wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-31
Local Operator Panel . . . . . E-7, E-10, E-42, E-43 move (pointer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82
Local Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-96 multiple frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-61
local time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-96
log printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10 N
LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10, E-26, E-42, E-43 NACOS Platinum, system description . . . . . . . I-22
LT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-96 navigation in lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50
LT (local time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-94 navigation, in menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50
LT/UTC, toggle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-99 Navigator Fitness Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
non-permanent area . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-51, I-54
M Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-28
M (Machinery alarms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-57 normal setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
main components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10 notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-14
main page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-47 notification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-46 numeric values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-43
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-51
MAintenance O
local time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . E-96 onscreen function keys (Workstation) . . . . E-113
UTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . E-95 Open in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-63
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . E-94 operator panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14, E-41
change password . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . E-100 output channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
display time & date . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . E-94 Outstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8, E-10, E-16
lamp test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. E-94, E-99
Local Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . E-94 P
LT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . E-96 PAGE DOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-114
password change . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . E-100 page printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-39
set time & date . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . E-94 PAGE UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-114
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . E-95 pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-69, I-79
UTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . E-94 panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
Version Control . . . . . . . . . . .. .. E-94, E-95 panel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-44
Manoeuvre Datalog . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . E-92 panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-41
Manoeuvre Datalog format . . . . . .. .. . . . . . E-88 panel location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-76
manual Alarm Cut-Out . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . E-29 Panel Setup, Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-75, E-76
Manual Cut-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . E-68 panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-26
Manual Cut-Out (Workstation) . . .. .. . . . . E-117 backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-48
Manual Cut-Out List . . . . . . . . . .. .. E-29, E-59 BAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42
Manual Cut-Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . E-58 Basic Alarm Panel (Accommodation) . . . E-42
MCS Platinum Basic Alarm Panel (Bridge) . . . . . . . . . . E-42
main functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15 Basic Alarm Panel (ECR) . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42
ED 3100 G 150 / Rev 03 (2011-12) VI-11

basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-41 disable automatic printing . . . . . . . . . . . E-91

Basic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-56 print disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-91
bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42 printer assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-88
cabin panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42 select printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-88
CCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42 PRINTER CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-51
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-41, E-44 Printer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-85
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-41 Printing
ECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42 Add. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-86
engine room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42 Suppressed (Cut-Out) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-86
layout drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-46 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-37, E-85
Local Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42 abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-88
LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42 Alarm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-141
numeric values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-43 Alarm Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-86
public rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42 Alarm System Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-93
types of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42 automatic cut-outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-86
value range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-43 cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-88
paper out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39 Changed Monitoring Channel list . . . . . . E-93
parameters, of monitoring channels . . . . . . E-61 configure Datalog format . . . . . . . . . . . E-142
password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-55 Cut-Out Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-91
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-94, E-100 cut-out lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-86
conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-101 Datalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-92
entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-55 Device Fail List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-86
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-55 interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-90
rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-101 Manoeuvre Datalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-92
password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-41, E-55 manual cut-outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-86
PC-Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-111 priority 1 alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-86
permanent area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-51, I-52 priority 1+2 alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-86
personnel, qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-18 Report Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-93
physical channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16 Sensor Fail List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-86
plain text output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-41 simulated channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-86
pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82 suppressed monitoring channels . . . . . . E-86
pointing hand (pointer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82 Prio. 1 list (Workstation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-128
popup edit window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-67 priorities
power off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39 alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-28
prevention of accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . I-15, E-3 priority 1 alarm list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-58, E-61
printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-39, E-37 priority 1+2 alarm list . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-58, E-61
alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10 priority, of alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-28, E-29
buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39 privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-41, E-55
busy signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39 processing alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-105
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-88 processing alarms (Workstation) . . . E-129, E-130
failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39 protected functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-55
log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10 public room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-33
logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-37 public room panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42
missing connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39 public room panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-33
paper out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39 push button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-69, I-73
power off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39
ready signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39 Q
reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-38 qualification of personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-18
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-38
time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39 R
printer configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-88 R (Reefer alarms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-57
Auto Print timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-88 ready signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39
cancel printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-88 report
choose printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-88 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-85
Datalog format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-88 Report Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-93
VI-12 ED 3100 G 150 / Rev 03 (2011-12)

reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-38 softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-49

requirements software channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-38 spin box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-69, I-77
resize (pointer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82 stand-alone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
right mouse button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-30 Standard Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39
standard setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
S standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-25
S1 to S4 softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-49 start page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-46
safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-13 starting applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-46
electrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-15 startup, of Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-40
electromagnetic radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . I-16 states, alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-28
electrostatic discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-16 status
ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-16 alarm group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30
safety inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-20 STOP HORN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-35, E-36, E-50
turning devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-15 Super Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-46
safety inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-20 Suppressed (Cut-Outs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-58
safety notes, general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-17 suppressed lists (Workstation) . . . . . . . . . E-128
safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-15 suppressing alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29
safety signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-15 simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-69
screen layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-45, I-47, E-111 system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
screen layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-60 system date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-49
scroll bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-76 system description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-22
scroll wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-31 System Operating Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10
scrollbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-69 system time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-49
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-57 system time, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-95
select keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50
Selectable Watch Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-31 T
sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16, E-17 tab
Sensor Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-28 context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-63
sensor fail list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-58, E-60 tabbed panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-62
Sensor Fail list (Workstation) . . . . . . . . . . . E-128 tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-64
sensor failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29, E-30 tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-62
serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-40 Tear Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-63
set date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-95 technical concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
set time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-95 technical terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
set time & date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-94 terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
set up deadman alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-102 testing panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-94, E-99
setup, system setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14 text edit cross hair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82
shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-57 TFT monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-28, I-36
Show Full Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-57 Thermonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
Shut Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-57 time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-49
shutdown, of Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-40 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-95
sidebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-51 entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-53
non-permanent area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-54 Local Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-96
permanent area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-52 LT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-96
sign, algebraic (+/-) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-43 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-95
signal validity failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30 UTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-95
simulated channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-58 time delay, channel parameter . . . . . . . . . . E-68
simulated monitoring channels . . . . . . . . . . . E-59 time format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-53
simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-69 time setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-43
Simulations (Workstation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-117 time, set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-94
single click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-31 time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39
slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-69, I-72 timer function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-37
S-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-57 title bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-48, I-51
ED 3100 G 150 / Rev 03 (2011-12) VI-13

toggle UTC/LT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-99 Cabin Assignment . . .. .. . .. .. . .. . . E-119

tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-68 deadman reset . . . . .. .. . .. .. . .. . . E-105
trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-30 screen layout . . . . . .. .. . .. .. . .. . . E-111
trackball pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82 WS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. .. . .. . . . E-33
transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17 attended . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. .. . .. . . . E-33
turning devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-15 unattended . . . . . . .. .. . .. .. . .. . . . E-33
types of clicks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-31
typographical conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-10 Z
zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-69, I-79
U
UI controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-69
unacknowledged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-28
unacknowledged alarm . . . . . . . . . . . E-28, E-30
unattended machinery area
Unattended Status (Workstation) . . . . . . . .E-118
Unattended Watch Station . . . . .E-32, E-36, E-72
Unattended WS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-25, E-36
undesired alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29
Unhide Sidebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-57
Unhide sidebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-58
Universal Time Coordinated . . . . . . . . . . . . E-94
unmanned machinery area, see unattended machin-
ery area
Unmanned Watch Station, see Unattended Watch
Station
user privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-55
UTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-94, E-95
UTC/LT, toggle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-99
V
value range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-43
value resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-43
Version Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-94, E-95
version information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-94, E-95
view angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-47
voltage, dangerous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-15
W
waiting (pointer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82
WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-14
warning system, see Notification System
warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-14
WATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-51, E-71
Watch Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-117
Watch Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8, E-25, E-33
Attended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-72
attended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-33
physical location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-76
select as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-71
Unattended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-72
unattended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-33
where is the WS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-76
Watch Station (Workstation) . . . . . . . . . . . .E-118
Watch Status (Workstation) . . . . . . . . . . . .E-117
Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . I-6, I-27, E-13, E-111
VI-14 ED 3100 G 150 / Rev 03 (2011-12)

NACOS Platinum List of Tables
List of Tables
Table I/ 1 Typographical conventions in these operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-12
Table I/ 2 Applicable Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-25
Table I/ 3 Types of clicks in NACOS Platinum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-31
Table I/ 4 Visibility of Expanders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-55
Table I/ 5 Items on the NACOS Platinum main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-57
Table I/ 6 Mouse pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82
Table I/ 7 RADAR and ECDIS pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-83
Table I/ 8 Machinery pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-84
Table E/ 1 Distribution of alarms to different panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-26
Table E/ 2 Alarm states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-28
Table E/ 3 Alarm group status values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30
Table E/ 4 Output of the Duty LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-33
Table E/ 5 Alarm LED and buzzer reactions in response to a new alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-35
Table E/ 6 Operator panel functions and function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-51
Table E/ 7 Available channel parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-66
Table E/ 8 Maintenance functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-94
Table E/ 9 Alarm List toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-122
Table E/ 10 Available list types for each alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-128
ED 3100 G 150 / Rev 03 (2011-12) VI-15

OI_ANC2010_LOT.fm
List of Tables NACOS Platinum
VI-16 ED 3100 G 150 / Rev 03 (2011-12)

OI_ANC2010_LOT.fm
NACOS Platinum List of Abbreviations
List of Abbreviations
A
AAP . . . . . . . . . Accommodation Alarm Panel
AIS . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Identification System
ANSI . . . . . . . . . American NAtional Standards Institute
B
BAP . . . . . . . . . Basic Alarm Panel (Bridge, ECR, Accommodation)
C
CCR . . . . . . . . . Cargo Control Room
E
ECDIS . . . . . . . . Electronic Chart Display and Information System
ECR . . . . . . . . . Engine Control Room
ENC . . . . . . . . . Electronic Navigation Chart
ESD . . . . . . . . . Electrostatic Discharge ,
ETA . . . . . . . . . Estimated Time of Arrival
G
GUI . . . . . . . . . . Graphical User Interface
I
IBS . . . . . . . . . . Integrated Bridge System
IMO . . . . . . . . . International Maritime Association
INS . . . . . . . . . . Integrated Navigation System
ISO . . . . . . . . . . International Standardisation Organisation
L
LCD . . . . . . . . . display of the type Liquid Crystal Display
LED . . . . . . . . . visual indicator of the type Light Emitting Diode
LOP . . . . . . . . . Local Operator Panel
LT . . . . . . . . . . . local time
M
MMI . . . . . . . . . Man Machine Interface
N
NACOS . . . . . . . Navigation Automation Control System
O
Outstation
P
PI . . . . . . . . . . . Parallel Index
PPI
PPI . . . . . . . . . . Plane Position Indicator,the Radar picture
ED 3100 G 150 / Rev 03 (2011-12) VI-17

OI_ANC2010Abbrev_IOM.fm
List of Abbreviations ANC2010
S
SFB . . . . . . . . . . Standard Function Block
T
TFT . . . . . . . . . Thin Film Transistor, a kind of Monitor
U
UI . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface
UMA . . . . . . . . . Unattended Machinery Area
UTC . . . . . . . . . Universal Time Coordinated
W
WS Watch Station
VI-18 ED 3100 G 150 / Rev 03 (2011-12)

OI_ANC2010Abbrev_IOM.fm
DOCUMENT HISTORY
NACOS Platinum VII-1 Document History
1 Document History
Docu- Revi- Date Author Changed Changes

ment sion pages
390000 - Sept. 2009 Finke, All Generation of the new operating
Lass, instructions
Spratek
390008506 01 Jan. 2011 Finke, All Generation of the new operating
Spratek instructions
390008506 01 Mar. 2011 Finke All Chapter Chartradar added,
correction of facts, pictures and
faults. Adaption of description
due to changes in software
390008506 02 Juli 1st 2011 Finke Several Latest corrections, released in
LiveLink and SAP
ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) VII-3

VII Document History.fm / 14.12.11
VII-1 Document History NACOS Platinum
VII-4 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

VII Document History.fm / 14.12.11

ED3100G150 (Operating Instructions MCS Platinum

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

ED3100G150 (Operating Instructions MCS Platinum

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Operating Instructions

Item No.: ED 3100 G 150 Revision: 03 (2011-12) Order No.: 390008513

SAM Electronics GmbH

3 NACOS Platinum System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 21

4 Multi Function Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 27

5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 45

ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) 3

5.2.1 Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 48

E MACHINERY MCS Platinum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 1

4 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

2.3 Basic Alarm System - Duty Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 12

3 Functional Description of the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E - 15

ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) 5

3.15 Standard Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 39

4 General Description of the Operator Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 41

5 Operating Instructions for the Operator Panels . . . . . . . . . . . E - 47

6 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

5.10.5 Printing Channel Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 66

ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) 7

5.17.2 Duty Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 107

6 Operating Instructions for the MFDs (PC-Stations) . . . . . . . . E - 111

7 Quick Reference – Functional Modes and Menus of Panels . . E - 133

8 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

7.10 [DEADMAN] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 144

VI LISTS AND INDEXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI - 1

VII DOCUMENT HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VII - 1

ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) 9

10 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

1 About these Operating Instructions

ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-3

1.1 Aim and Scope of these Operating Instructions

I-4 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

1.2 Validity of these Operating Instructions

ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-5

1.3 Availability of these Operating Instructions

I-6 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

1.4 How to Find Information in the Operating Instructions

ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-7

1.4.1 Structure of the Operating Instructions

I-8 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

1.4.2 How to find Information on Specific Subjects

ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-9

1.5 Typographical Conventions

I-10 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

Main > Submenu This is an abbreviated way for:

☞ This symbol indicates a hint.

<variable> Describes a text string of variable length and contents.

ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-11

DD-MMM-YYYY The date in international format which is used in the system.

Table I / 1 Typographical conventions in these operating instructions

I-12 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-13

2.1 Warnings and Notes in these Operating Instructions

I-14 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

2.2 Meaning of Safety Signs

DANGER! WORK IN PROGRESS! DO NOT SWITCH!

ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-15

WARNING! ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION!

ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES!

I-16 ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12)

2.3 General Safety Notes – NACOS Platinum

ED 3100 G 150 / 03 (2011-12) I-17

2.4 Authorisation and Qualification of Personnel